Home

NetSupport School - CDI Computer Dealers Inc.

Contents

1. Files to Collect Collect files Diary pa Cancel Collect from folder at Student Desktop aa Delete files on Student s computer after collecting Vv Folder to Collect To on your computer X Browse Z Specify the name of the file s to collect e g or Test1 TXT Test2 TXT Specify the folder that the file s are stored in e g C TEMP and whether you want to remove the file from the Student workstation after it has been collected Specify the folder on the Control workstation to collect the file s in e g C TEMP Click Collect The result of the operation will be displayed for you to check that the work has been collected successfully To Collect Work Using Advanced Collect 1 190 Choose School Send Collect Work Advanced from the Control window drop down menu bar Or Click the Send Collect icon drop down arrow on the Control toolbar and select Send Collect The Send Collect Work wizard will open NetSupport School 11 41 Select the required operation from the list and click Collect Work The Select Students dialog will appear Select the Students that you want to retrieve the file s from Select Students sm Select the Students to Send the files to Members of Group Year 7 These Clients D Help a S mdy invizzes 73 Eddie XP SP3 Removing the check mark next to a Client excludes it from the operation Summary Send 1 files to Folder Desktop at S
2. Note Because of the way NetSupport School Deploy handles restarting workstations leave the Restart Machine box un checked This is only relevant when performing a Silent Install where The Install Configuration Options dialog is also used for specifying the options to install When you have completed this dialog choose File Save to save the NSS ini file to the folder containing the distribution copy of NetSupport School Choose File Exit to return to the Install Properties dialog 31 32 NetSupport School 11 41 Options tab Use the information supplied in the Network and Security tabs to identify which machines may already have NetSupport School installed you can then choose to Ignore them by checking the Skip machines already running NetSupport School box Update the machines with the latest version by checking the Update new or older systems to current version box After deploying the package you can confirm that the Client is running by checking the Verify Client running after restarting box Ensure that workstations are restarted automatically after the deploy for this option to work See Restart tab Acknowledgement tab Consider whether the workstations will be in use when commencing the deploy You can choose to e Install NetSupport School Immediately No prompt will be received at the workstations being deployed to e Warn user before installing NetSupport School The user will receive
3. r T JJa 4S we There are 1 540 seconds in a day 3 amp Example Test Identify the countries by dragging the correct name to Using the picture provided answer these questions o Identify the flags for each of these African nations Put these oceans in order of size Largestto Smallest Listen to the music and identify which country this is thy 9 Choose the correct year that these countries hosted tH h of the Seven Wonders of the World is still stand Complete the following sentences Choose the correct dates for these famous events After viewing the picture provided identify which of the Name the aeroplane shown in the video clip E 9 Identify the correct capital cities for the countries listec Corr tional flags to each country D asss min nach afthann nantinanta lt i 5 For Help press FL NUM er LLL M The main toolbar provides shortcuts to a number of general tasks such as creating user accounts importing and exporting data and managing question resources The Layout toolbar icon enables you to customise the Designer Interface should you wish to work in either Question or Exam mode Select Normal Layout to return to the default interface Note An online resource centre is available providing teachers with access to a wide range of curriculum based information that can be used within the Testing Module The portal is provided and managed by NetSupport
4. 1 Choose View Mode Q amp A View from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Q amp A Control icon on the left hand side of the Control window 2 The Question Types dialog will appear 233 NetSupport School 11 41 Select a question type First to answer Students are asked a question and have to amp answer as quickly as possible E Enter an answer Tutor enters the answer and Students have amp to answer as quickly as possible Pot luck Students selected at random and asked a question Team first to answer Students are asked a question and have to answer as quickly as possible Team enter an answer Tutor enters the answer and Students have to answer as quickly as possible There are five types of questions to choose from First to Answer Enter an Answer Pot Luck Team First to Answer Team Enter an Answer 3 Select a question type to continue 4 The Ask the question dialog is displayed Set the required properties for the question and click OK Ask the question Ea Question Options Thinking Time Q 15 seconds E Time Limit Bounce Options F Automatically bounce to next Student Number of students to include 3 leave empty to include all Options Help Cancel 5 Click Go to start the Question and Answer session 6 The Tutor will display the Student thumbnails
5. 2 Select Publish Class and allow Students to Join 3 Enter a name and description for the class This is the name that will appear at the Student machine when they try to connect 4 Click OK 5 To apply the changes immediately click Yes 6 The Join Class dialog will appear This lists the Student names as they connect to the class Class Mrs Brown anan Your students can join this class by selecting the option from the student icon in their system tray History 7 Click Done when all Students have connected You can now conduct a remote control session with the connected Students 70 NetSupport School 11 41 Note If new Students want to join the class select Manage Class from the toolbar and then click Refresh to display the Join Class dialog The Student machines will only find the class if this dialog is active To join a class Student machines that have the NetSupport School Client program installed can browse the network to find classes 1 At the Student machine select the NetSupport School Client icon from the taskbar 2 Choose Commands Join a Class from the Client drop down menu 3 The Join Class dialog will appear and immediately search the network for classes NetSupport Join Class oda Class Help gt g Refresh Name Teacher Lesson Title Address 4 Highlight the required Class and click Join 5 When the connection ha
6. Frame Advance Advance the replay index to the next frame Press and hold this button to Fast Forward though the replay file Skip to Next marker Moves the replay index to the next activity marker or to the end of the file if there isn t one Mute Turn audio on off within the Replay file Other Information The current time index is displayed to the right of these controls in the hh mm ss ms format The name of the Client that the replay was recorded on the date and time are displayed at the bottom of the window Replay Marker This marker can be positioned anywhere within the time frame of the replay file The marker is the small black triangle beneath the time index control Click and drag this to the position where you want the file to stop playing When the marker is encountered the replay stops and you can then press play to continue past it 168 NetSupport School 11 41 Showing Replay Files to Students Using NetSupport School s Show feature a Tutor can show a stored Replay file to any number of connected Students 1 Click the Show Menu icon on the Control toolbar and choose Show Replay Or Choose Student Show Show Replay from the Control window drop down menu Or Choose School Replay Files from the Control window drop down menu and select Show Replay 2 The Show Replay dialog will appear NetSupport School Show Replay Se BATE ee eee Hep 3 Browse for and select the
7. Note Rewards can be allocated deducted outside of a Question and Answer session select Student Rewards from the Control window drop down menu Questions can be bounced around the class encouraging discussion You can also ask Students to peer assess an answer to find out if they thought it was correct or not You can move onto the next round by selecting Q amp A Next Round from the Control window drop down menu or clicking on the Next Round icon at the bottom of the Control window A new session for the current question type can be started by clicking the New icon at the bottom of the Control window You can stop the current Question Type and clear Question and Answer dialogs on the Student machines by clicking Reset at the bottom of the Control window Excluding Students To ensure all Students are involved equally in the process you can choose to exclude specific students those that have already answered a question from the next round of questioning Students are automatically excluded from a round if either of the Exclude options in the Question amp Answer options dialog have been selected Students can be manually excluded right click the Student and select Exclude Student from round Sound Effects You can include sound effects to be played at the Tutor and Students Sounds will be played at the Tutor when a Student answers at the Student when the Answer dialog is displayed and at both when randomly selecting a Stu
8. Once you have completed part one of the wizard click Next 341 NetSupport School 11 41 Label Image Students are presented with a picture that has up to four areas marked each with an adjacent blank text box At the bottom of their screen will be up to four text labels which they must drag and drop into the correct text box The first stage of five is to enter the question along with up to four text labels You then select the image that the Students will need to label Click Browse to search for the images The list of pictures currently stored in the Images database will appear Either select an existing image or import a new one Click Use to apply the image to the question Label Image Wizar Ca Question Identify the countries in the map Label 1 India Label 2 Canada Label 3 Australia Label 4 Spain Image to label Image File Map of World al ge ae Enter the instructions at the top of the page then specify up to four labels that will need to be correctly located on the image Select the image by using the Browse button When done click Next to proceed ED ee Ge Once you have completed part one of the wizard click Next If the image you have chosen for the Label Image question is too large for the viewable area you can resize it 342 NetSupport School 11 41 98 9 Ifthe image you have selected is greater than the viewable area in the player then scroll the i
9. The Client will receive a message indicating that they have been given Group Leader status They can choose to run the Group Leader Control immediately or at a later stage by clicking on the Group Leader icon that will be created in their system tray or Student Toolbar Notes e Although a Client may be in more than one group they can only lead one group at a time e Each defined group can have a Group Leader even if one of the group members is already leading another group e The main Control can continue to monitor all Clients including Group Leaders 102 NetSupport School 11 41 Suspend Group Leaders During a Control session where Group Leaders are in place the Tutor may want to perform a task without conflicting with something the Group Leaders are doing Rather than remove and reinstate each Group Leader individually you can globally suspend and reinstate Group Leader access as required To Suspend Group Leaders 1 Choose School Suspend Group Leaders from the Control window drop down menu 2 All Group Leaders will be suspended To Reinstate Group Leaders 1 Choose School Suspend Group Leaders from the Control window drop down menu 2 All Group Leaders will be reinstated Remove Group Leader The main Control can remove Group Leader status from Clients at any time To Remove Group Leaders 1 From the Control window select the Group containing the required Client 2 Right click the C
10. This will have negligible visual impact when remotely viewing applications but may be seen when viewing multimedia Typically this mode should be applied only when network utilisation is a priority V Use performance settings f wireless detected Cere Gre Low bandwidth mode This mode is designed for network environments where low data usage is a priority When enabled video performance and quality will be reduced and limit network activity Colour reduction When enabled the colour palette will be reduced from full colour to 256 colours This will have negligible visual impact when remotely viewing applications but may be seen when viewing multimedia Typically this mode should be applied only when network utilisation is a priority 288 NetSupport School 11 41 Use performance settings if wireless detected When the Wireless Network option is enabled the Tutor Performance settings will automatically be turned on You can disable these settings by unchecking this option Student Selection Use these options to pre determine the Students to connect to when the Tutor program starts and in what mode Note If a Name Server Gateway has been configured the Tutor program will use the details registered here rather than perform a browse across the network Settings for Configuration NetSupport School s a Start 4 Start Options Room Mode G2 Start Options Connect to Students in Room
11. ssssssssssssrssrsrnssrrsrrnnnnsrnernnnnnens 28 Preparing a DeployMent ccc ee cece cece ee eee eee tees ee E a 29 Deploy a NetSupport School Package cceceeeeeeee tees eee eeeeeeeeaeaee 30 Deploy a Client Configuration cccceeee cece ee ee ee ee ee ee ease ease eeeeaeaee 35 Deploy a NetSupport School Licence file cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 36 Remote Uninstall sterea aa aaa a a ea Aian 37 Pre Define Settings For A Future Deployment sceeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 39 LOG FICS sc icutivatisesdaaensaed anan araar ia ada a iaa a inaia 40 NetSupport School Deploy ROOM Mode s ssssssssrssrssrssrnsrrnnnnnrnrnnsnnnenn 41 STARTING NETSUPPORT SCHOOL scscscseseeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeenens 43 Starting NetSupport School cceeeeee cece ee eee e eee eee seen e eee eaten eee 43 The Control WINdOW isinsi aeiae insania cn deat iana aaa aeaa dead ines 45 T tor TOO bakarri i a Ea aE AEA E aE 50 Student AUtOMatic LOGIN cress imienia A a E Ai 51 StU ENTIREGISTCR intier sie e aaa da nn Ea a aaia TaN 52 Working with Classroom Layouts ssssssssssressssrrssrnrrnnrnnrnnrnnnrnsrnerans 57 Setting a background misrit riiin a aa uaa a a a aY 58 Power Management Power on Power Off c cceeeeeeeeeeeeee tees eeeaeaeas 60 Client Power OMe aeaa aaa a a a a aa a a aaa aaia 60 Client Power Off cassinii anr a a aiaa PEARa DETE RET EETA 61 Finding and Connecting to Students ccececeeeee
12. 3 Students will only be able to view websites from the Approved list and the Proxy Settings Exception list 207 NetSupport School 11 41 Note Websites listed in the Proxy Settings Exception list will not appear in the list of approved websites at the Student Apply SafeSearch mode The SafeSearch feature overrides the search settings for most leading search engines and prevents inappropriate content being returned within search results Note When using Google searches can be performed using HTTPS instead of HTTP SafeSearch is unable to filter HTTPS web pages You can block HTTPS for Google see https support google com websearch answer 186669 hl en for more information 1 Choose Web Safe Search Mode from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Safe Search icon at the bottom of the Control window Block FTP sites Prevent Students from accessing FTP sites to stop the exchanging of files 1 Choose Web Block FTP Sites from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Block FTP icon at the bottom of the Control window 2 Access to FTP sites will now be blocked 208 NetSupport School 11 41 Create a new Website list 1 2 3 To create a new Website list choose Web Create new Website List A dialog will appear Enter a file name and click Create A new blank Website list will appear Note The default Website List is saved as NetSupport School web Open an
13. Close Close down an application but respect any applications requests at the Student e g to save file before closing Kill Force the application to close without any application prompts Name Current Application Running Applications P James smith XP SP3 Microsoft Virtual PC 2007 CEN FOOD BB a eow 13 Cakuptoe ga Calculator YJ Add to Approved List Q Add to Restricted List fa Activate E Close Application fa Kill Process 1 To close an application running on a Student workstation choose View Details 2 The Details List view will appear 3 Right click an application icon listed under Current Application or Running Application in the List view 4 Choose Close Application or Kill Process 5 The application will be closed at the Student workstation and the icon will disappear from the List view Note By right clicking on an application in the Approved or Restricted List the Tutor is able to Close a running application on all connected Students To close all applications at the Student All running applications at the Student will be forced to close 1 Select the Students you wish to close applications at 2 Select the Student Desktop icon on the toolbar 3 Click Clear Desktop and then click Yes 219 NetSupport School 11 41 Change the current application running on a Student workstation 1 uau AUN 9 To change the current application running on a Student machine choose Vie
14. Enter the password this will have been set at the NetSupport School Tutor console The default port is 37777 This can be changed but would also need to be amended at the NetSupport School Tutor Note The NetSupport School Tutor will need to authorise the first connection from the NetSupport School Tutor Assistant The Tutor Assistant toolbar icon will change to ta when the Tutor Assistant service is started and connections are allowed Features supported on Tablets Support for Android and iPad tablets View student thumbnails Send students a preset message Block Restricted websites Set Approved websites Block All internet access Lock Unlock student computers Logoff student computers Blank Unblank student screens Restrict student printing Set Approved applications Block Restricted applications Select a group of students Details View View student Help Request notifications Zoom on student Sort students by name tutor order View current application View current websites 81 NetSupport School 11 41 Set connection password Tutor badge displaying the number of currently connected Tutor Assistants Features supported on Smartphones 82 Support for Android and Apple iOS smartphones Send students a preset message Block Restricted websites Set Approved websites Block All internet access Lock Unlock student computers Logoff student computers Blank Unblank student scre
15. Enter your instructions in the bax at the top of the screen Then enter up to four labels in each of the option boxes Then select the Browse button to the right of each option and select the image that matches the statement When the question is published the Student will need to choose which image matches each statement cence He Once you have completed part one of the wizard click Next 340 NetSupport School 11 41 Combo List The Student is presented with up to four statements alongside each statement is a drop down list containing a choice of possible answers They must select the correct answer from the list The first stage of three is to enter the instructions along with up to four statements or phrases Alongside each statement enter the correct answer text You can then add two further dummy answers meaning that when the question is run at Student machines the Student will be shown all possible answers to choose from Instructions A Where would you find these landmarks Question Text Answer Text Tet1 Eye a London Tet 2 Bffel Tower a Paris Tet3 Colosseum a Rome Text 4 Pathanon a Athens Dummy Answers _ Dummy 2 New York ae Enter up to four different statements for each statement enter the correct answer in the text box provided In addition add two incorrect answers in the boxes marked Dummy 1 and 2 The student will be shown all possible answers to choose from tees Cra Hee
16. IM and I Keyboard Mouse au 2 Replay Files Audio 7 Enable Student Toolbar File Transfer Make the toolbar always visible 4 User Interface Toolbar options 2 Tutor eer 7 Show the Image associated with this Student a Pi 7 Shows the logged on user name or name entered on the Stude Tutor Assistant 7 Class and Teacher Information Group Leaders Z Show amount of time left in the Lesson 8 Student Toolbar 7 Indicate when typing is being monitored Journal V Show Instant Messenger metering state J Show Printer status Blocked Paused etc J Show Application Monitoring status and give access to approv 7 Show Intemet Monitoring status and give access to approved v Allow the Student to initiate a Chat 7 Allow the Student to send a request for help J Shom Clack Show m mca c Hep Enable Student Toolbar Enables the Student toolbar Make the toolbar always visible Decide whether to make the toolbar always visible at the top of the Student screen or to auto hide Toolbar options Select the options that will be displayed on the Student toolbar 317 NetSupport School 11 41 Tutor Journal Settings A Journal is provided allowing key information from the lesson to be stored in a portable PDF file You can use these options to customise the settings for the Journal stored at the Tutor To customise the settings for the Student Journal choose Start Programs NetSupport
17. If you are Showing to only one Client both the Control and Client can speak If you are Showing to many only the Control can speak Announce Show Hotkeys To ensure that all actions performed by the Control are visible to the Clients during a show you can enable the use of Hotkeys Any key combinations that the Control uses e g CTRL V will be displayed in a balloon at both the Control and Client screens Notes e If using a mixture of key combinations e g ALT V T NetSupport School will only display two consecutive keystrokes at any one time e This utility is only supported on Windows XP and above Send Physical Fonts In order to reduce the volume of data being sent when sharing information of this nature NetSupport School passes the font information by reference The target workstation will refer to its own internal font mappings to find an appropriate match to the one that has been sent In most cases the same fonts will be available but if there are instances where this isn t the case you can send the full information Check this box to enable Screen Scrape NetSupport School s favoured and the most efficient method for capturing screen data is to hook into the Video Driver of the workstation being viewed However there may be occasions when this method will not work because certain applications bypass the driver In these circumstances you can enable screen scrape mode in order to take a 138 Ne
18. Student Show Resume from the Control window drop down menu 2 Clients will now see the application currently displayed at the Control 3 The Showing dialog will be displayed on the Control screen from which you can choose to End Resume or Continue the Show To end a Show while Suspended 1 Choose Student Show End Show from the Control window drop down menu 2 Clients will now see their own display To set a Show Leader while Suspended With the Show suspended the Control can assign Show Leader status to one of the selected Clients This unlocks the mouse and keyboard of the Client enabling them to take over the demonstration The Control continues to oversee the Show and can End the Show as required 140 NetSupport School 11 41 Show Leader While the Control screen is being shown to the class it may be appropriate for a Student to take over the demonstration For this purpose the Control can assign Show Leader status to a selected Student The mouse and keyboard of the Show Leader s PC are unlocked and they can continue the presentation on the Control s behalf The Control can still interact simultaneously with the Show Leader and can suspend or end the session as required To create a Show Leader 1 Start Showing the Control screen to Students as normal 2 When you are ready to create a Show Leader click the NetSupport School button on the taskbar 3 This will display the Showing dialog and the
19. The Messenger Monitoring feature is also not supported For further information please contact our Technical Support team www netsupportsoftware com support NetSupport School Licence Agreement The NetSupport Licence Agreement will be displayed Please read the Licence Agreement carefully and select I accept the terms in the Licence Agreement and click Next to continue If you reject the Licence Agreement I do not accept the terms in the Licence Agreement click Cancel NetSupport School will not be installed and you will be directed to exit from the install program 16 NetSupport School 11 41 Licence Information Select Register and enter the NetSupport School licence details you have been provided with If you are evaluating NetSupport select 30 day evaluation Choose what type of licence you wish to use e All platforms Your Students are all Windows based or using a mixture of Windows Chromebooks and tablets e Chrome students only Your Students are all using Google Chromebooks e Tablet students only Your Students are all using Tablets Click Next Select Setup Type Choose the setup type to install on the workstation i J NetSupport School InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits your needs E This computer is used by Student A Select this option to install the Student software utor Si T i Select this option to install the Tutor softw
20. When Scanning Student screens choose View Capture Screen to capture the current screen contents Or Click the Capture icon on the toolbar Notes e When Scanning Multiple Students a Student screen must be active highlighted for the Screen Capture feature to become available e When capturing in the Scan session one Student at a time Auto Scan is temporarily suspended until the Screen Capture operation is complete Once complete Auto Scan is re enabled automatically and the Scan of the next Student continues A Save As dialog will appear Type in a File name Choose one of the three different file formats BMP JPG and PNG Click Save uau AUN 135 NetSupport School 11 41 Showing to Students The Show feature enables the Control user to emphasise key learning points by displaying the information on their screen to a selected Client or group of Clients You can also show a stored replay file audio file a video or an application that is currently running at the Control During a Show the Control can nominate a selected Client to take over the demonstration making them the Show Leader Note When showing the Control screen to Clients the screen information is sent to each Client machine in turn In some network environments where there is limited network bandwidth available or when showing to larger numbers of machines this can affect performance In these circumstances NetSupport School s Broad
21. Windows Intemet Explorer 01 19 12 09 39 52 peijle INVH368 Screen Saver 01 19 12 09 39 30 testing XP SP3 Google Google Chrome 01 19 12 09 39 26 tastinn INVH147 Gannia Minnenf Intamat Eunlnrar _ 91 19 19 N 20 16 Epot Print Help Cose The available options are Show Application History for The list can be viewed by currently Selected Client or All Connected Clients Refresh While viewing the list click Refresh at any time to update the display Save To keep a permanent record of the displayed items you can save the details to a text file before disconnecting 225 226 NetSupport School 11 41 Print Prints details of the currently displayed items Export Exports data to a CSV file allowing the data to be imported if needed Close Closes the History dialog but details will continue to be recorded while the Control is connected NetSupport School 11 41 Student Surveys The Student Survey tool enables the Tutor to get instant feedback from Students during or at the end of a session The Tutor sends connected Students a question together with a selection of pre defined responses Student responses are gathered at the Tutor with the results shown as an overall percentage and by individual Student Results can be shown to Students in the form of a pie chart Students must respond before they can view the results Students can also be temporarily grouped by response enabl
22. from the Control window drop down menu Or Right click the Client icon and choose Inventory Or Click the Inventory icon on the toolbar The Inventory window for the selected Client will appear Note Once collected the various Client inventories are stored locally in the NetSupport School program folder meaning that you do not need to be connected to the target PC to be able to view the information at a later date Simply select the required Client from the List view and choose the Inventory option However if you subsequently want to refresh the inventory you do need to connect to the target PC 326 NetSupport School 11 41 Policy Management The Tech Console allows you to create a set of policy restrictions that can be applied across the whole school The policy can include Internet Application USB CD DVD and Print restrictions In Report mode you can view the current policy restrictions for Clients Hovering over the icons in the Policy column displays further information about the current policy The NetSupport School Tutor is notified of any policy restrictions that are in force A lock icon will be displayed next to the relevant feature advising that a central policy has been applied Note The Tutor can override central policies for their Students in the NetSupport School Tutor Start Option settings Policy Management Intemet Mode Resticted Description Add e Remove E
23. pes Create teams randomly allow student to choose their team or use current groups as teams v Assign Randomly Number of teams 3 Allow student to choose their team Team names Students select from this list separate names with Use current groups as teams Students not in a group will be excluded Help Cancel 241 NetSupport School 11 41 4 Select how to group the teams If randomly enter the number of teams If Student chooses team enter the team names the Students will then be able to pick a team from a drop down list Click OK 5 The Team Summary dialog will appear showing how many Students are in each team NetSupport School randomly allocates colours to teams you can change this by clicking the colour and selecting a new colour 6 Click OK The question and answer session will start as normal The Tutor screen will display which team each Student is in The default Group bar is replaced with one containing the teams The team statistics will be displayed to students in the Question and Answer dialog Rewards will now be awarded to the team and not the individual 242 NetSupport School 11 41 Printer Management Print Management gives the Tutor total control over printer usage within the classroom the Tutor can monitor and control all printing activity by connected Students or printer Students can be prevented from printing be assigned page limits or require Tutor authorisation to
24. testing XP SP3 New Tab 7 a testing INVH142 Hotmail Messenger Latest news Sport Music Movies Cars MSN UK a testing XP SP3 New Tab testing XP SP3 Google zp 2 pcije INVH288 BBC Leaming online leaming resources z 2 pcijle INVH288 http www bbc co uk T amp peijle INVH288 bbc Google Search z 2 peijle INVH288 NetSupport Intranet pijle INVH288 http rad msn com ADSAdCiient31 dll GetAd amp PG IMSUKM amp AP 1007 z amp Boo foboRoFoCIEIECIEICIE z 2 pcijle INVH288 Today on MSN m Saven Epot _ Print The available options are Show Web History for The list can be viewed by currently Selected Client or All Connected Clients Refresh While viewing the list click Refresh at any time to update the display 210 NetSupport School 11 41 Save To keep a permanent record of the displayed items you can save the details to a text file before disconnecting Print Prints details of the currently displayed items Export Exports data to a CSV file allowing the data to be imported if needed Close Closes the History dialog but details will continue to be recorded while the Control is connected 211 Co Browser NetSupport School 11 41 NetSupport School provides the Tutor and Students with a shared Web Browser This enables the Tutor to lead a browser session navigating Students through various web pages with the added se
25. 2012 jearp netsupp Did you want to goto mine at lunch 4 Students 124 NetSupport School 11 41 Identify Students Instant Messenger Activity In the List view the Student icons can be viewed in two different ways Choose View Large icons Details or right click in the List view and select one of these options to change the layout of the Student icons When viewing the Large icons layout an icon is displayed next to the Student icon showing that the Student is signed into Instant Messenger If the List view is in Details layout the Instant Messenger status for each Student is displayed You can filter the Instant Messenger activity by choosing IM Filter Show Sign In Show Sign Out Show Messages Show File Transfer from the Control window drop down menu The lower panes can be minimised to make more room for the Student thumbnails Click the button Monitor Instant Messenger 1 Choose IM Monitor from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Monitor Activity icon at the bottom of the Control window 2 You can now monitor Students Instant Messenger Note If monitoring is enabled and you switch modes an icon will be displayed on the Messenger tab to acknowledge that Messenger monitoring is currently switched on Block Instant Messenger 1 Choose IM Block from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Block icon at the bottom of the Control window 2 The M
26. 355 questions mode 333 adding resources to questions 346 create combo list question 339 create drag and drop image question 338 create drag and drop text question 337 create label image question 340 create multi true or false question 344 create multi choice question 336 create order items question 345 create true or false question 343 delete questions subjects topics 350 observation mode 347 store questions 348 quiet mode 271 reboot 197 register students 52 reinstate group leader 102 remote clipboard 113 launching applications at Clients 191 log off Client workstations 197 remote command prompt 329 remote deploy utility 26 remote install a Client configuration 35 375 NetSupport School 11 41 a NetSupport School license file 36 a NetSupport School package 30 log files 40 remote uninstall 37 remove group leader 102 replay file settings 302 replay files 161 control panel 166 converting replay files 169 create at the tutor 164 create for all students 162 create for selected students 163 showing to students 168 watch 165 reports test results 364 restricted application list See application control module restricted website list See web control module room mode 68 scale to fit mode 110 scanning 115 monitor mode 120 multi scan 118 screen capture 133 Screen Capture 133 security configure at Client 268 security key Client 268 control 290 select setup type 17 sele
27. Add Or To edit an existing question select it from the list change the question and or the responses and click Add Note If you change the question it will be added to the list in addition to the original If you only change the responses the original will be overwritten To use the question in a Survey select it from the list and click OK The question will be displayed in the Survey pane ready to be sent to Students Note When you use customised responses in a Survey they will be attached to that question only If you want to make the responses available to other Surveys they need to be added to the default drop down list Click Manage the Manage Responses dialog will appear enter the required responses and click Add 232 NetSupport School 11 41 Question and Answer Module NetSupport School s Question and Answer module is a unique collaborative tool that enables teachers to reinforce key learning points and instantly gauge student understanding during a lesson You can verbally ask questions to the whole class gauge student answers and understanding bounce questions around the classroom develop peer assessment opportunities as well as track rewards against both the individual and where appropriate teams Note The Student toolbar will be enabled and displayed at the Student even if the toolbar is turned off at the Tutor
28. Description g 2 Alex Brown i 2 James Smith Removing the check mark next to a Client excludes it from the Show A 5 Show Options v Restrict Internet access to approved sites only during show B E Set Show Mode at Client Full Screen fe Enable Audio F Show Hotkeys Screen Scrape a Send Physical Fonts 5 Create Replay file at Student In this dialog you select the Client or Clients that you will Show your screen to and set any associated properties Select what you would like to Show NetSupport School will identify if the Control is running multiple monitors giving you the option to choose which one to Show from the drop down list If you are unsure which the correct screen is click Identify Alternatively select Whole Desktop to show all Select Recipients Select the Client or Clients that you will Show your screen to Show Options Restrict Internet access to approved sites only during a show 137 NetSupport School 11 41 Allows the Tutor to only access websites that are on the Approved Site List preventing inappropriate websites being displayed to Students during a Show Set Show Mode at Client Windowed Full Screen or Maximise Window This option allows you to Show at the Client either in a small window full screen or maximised window size When showing in windowed and maximised window size the Clients Mouse and Keyboard are not locked Enable Audio This turns Audio Support on
29. ENE SUPVEYS ssrin inapina teias la ldeasden A K rE 227 SUPVEYSEISUES S ainia A tea Laks cerane a tai k a arate 230 Question and Answer MOdUI cccceceseeeeeeee ee eeeea eee eeeaenaeneeaeaenaeneeas 233 Question and Answer Module Tutor Interface cccceeeeeeeea eee ees 237 Using the Question and Answer Module e eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 239 Question and Answer Team Mode cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeneeaeaenneaneas 241 Printer Managementa nienia anaa an eee eee ened eee ee deen aaa eee aaa 243 Using Print MAanagGeMent ccciceeeete cece eee e eee eee n een ee teen een enna ees 245 VIEW Print HIStOLy sssi ccceveecenccnaccacccueaceaceuadcetgataedsrceucesancenseceuseneas 248 Device COMUOL tiie n bid cdael a a aa aa hidaagat eens 250 Tutor Profile Sitera aranna aia dveued quad ots acetdneledanPenad ade ened lad otene 253 Manage Student ReSOUICES c ccececeeeeeenensececeseseaeaeaeneeeeeeeesenaeneneeee 255 Student JOU Al sisser aia reana aa sabes ae EE EE EENE aa e 256 LESSON PIANNER rorida aaaea Eaa O EErEE ua aia 260 Student Toolbar Aiaren aaa a a a E T a ainai 262 St dent Reward Sesera ainue ne i vane acetensnaes AA cated es deavaaveaseeeeesnveencs 265 CONFIGURING THE STUDENT WORKSTATION 0ceseeeeeeeeeeeeee 266 Network Settihg S eea inae aa tats cates code A a E AE AAEE Ea ataa 267 ROOM Setting Seisa e a a E E a a a a a 268 Security Setting S aree a A E N AT ANE AEA 269 A dio Settings raana aa a aa a
30. Eire sales netsupportsoftware co uk Sales International sales netsupportsoftware com North America www netsupport inc com Technical Support support netsupport inc com Sales sales netsupport inc com Germany Austria and Switzerland www pci software de Technical Support support pci software de Sales sales pci software de Japan www netsupportjapan com Technical Support support netsupportsoftware com Sales sales netsupportjapan com 370 NetSupport School 11 41 INDEX access point speed 283 adding notes to the student journal 255 adding resources to questions 346 android 86 annotating screens 147 annotate toolbar 148 interactive whiteboard 144 application show application 170 application control module 215 approved restricted lists 219 close application 218 history 224 identify applications in use 216 arrange Client icons 57 assign group leader 100 audio monitoring 150 audio settings 303 audio support 154 adjusting audio settings 156 announcement make a 154 configure at Client 270 automatically reconnect to students 74 308 automtaic login 51 backgrounds 58 blanking Client screens 105 111 all screens 112 bouncing questions 239 broadcast show 135 283 on wireless network 283 browse mode 65 browsing configuring subnets 75 for Clients at installation 43 for students at startup 62 for terminal server Clients 79 cache size 275 cancel group leader 102 c
31. NetSupport School s default NetSupport School Client Configurator lt TD Network Settings Student Identification Room Student Name machine name MARKETINGO1 Security x Audio tS User Interface Advanced Silent Mode no refresh when Viewing Send Physical Fonts While Viewed Journal Terminal Services Enpatia Seaan sane Performance 4 Cache Size ieme Image Option Image File nss_lock_image ipg Browse Enable DVD Playback and Direct 3D support Except while viewed T Except while connected OK Cancel Help Student Identification Student name This is the name that the Client will be known as on the network for NetSupport School purposes It must be a unique name of up to 15 characters You should try to use a sensible naming convention to help you identify which workstation is which It is also important to prefix each name ina group of related Clients with the same few characters as this will be used when the Control connects to establish the workgroup For example you might start the name of each workstation in the same room with the prefix CLASS1_ Then configure the Control to connect to all Clients starting with CLASS1__ will avoid Client workstations outside of this room being inadvertently connected and receiving a show You can use an asterisk to cause the Client name to default to the machine name also known as the Computer name 274 NetSupport Scho
32. NetSupport Ltd so to do to remedy the breach such request to contain a warning of NetSupport s intention to terminate Upon termination you will destroy or return to NetSupport Ltd the original and all copies of the software and will confirm in writing to NetSupport Ltd that this has been done SUPPORT If you have a problem with the installation of the software you should in the first instance contact your supplier You can separately purchase support and maintenance which will also cover the supply of enhancements and upgrades GOVERNING LAW This agreement shall be governed by the laws of England NetSupport School 11 41 Table of Contents What is NetSupport School ccceeeee cece ee ee ee ee ee ease ee eeee anata ea eaeeeeees 10 Conventions Used resape aurai deus cep aN aa e goes tavetaeedeevenaeses 12 Terminology US di i iarisisrire ami aaa a E a a ai a 12 INSTALLATION oc cccceceeeeeeeeeeee eaaa aaa aha eaaa na aaea aaa Ana aaa ENA 13 Sy yst Mm PrezRegqUISItES v aaa aaa eed a A a a i a aia 14 Starting the Installation s sssssssssssssrrssrssrserrrnnsnnnnrurnnnnnnrnnrnnnrnnrnnrans 16 Creating an administrative network installation sssssessssrsesrrerrrres 23 Silent Installationen araa aaa a aaa ERA A raa inai deca 24 Install Configuration Options Dialog s s s ssssssssssressssrrserenrssrnsrnnnnnens 25 NetSupport School Deploy NetSupport School s Remote Install Utility 26 Starting NetSupport School Deploy
33. NetSupport School 11 41 Using a Name Server Gateway to Find Student PCs The NetSupport School Name Server or Gateway is provided as an optional installation component Its purpose is to provide a simple and reliable method of locating and connecting to Student PCs in LAN Wireless LAN environments This can be particularly useful where Students transport laptops from class to class making it difficult for traditional connectivity options to find them Once configured Student PCs connect to the Name Server on startup and register their availability and current IP address with the Server At the Tutor end when browsing to locate Students a search of the Name Server is performed rather than a UDP browse across the network The Tutor program uses the IP address registered with the Name Server The Name Server can be used with all three startup modes The advantages of using a Name Server over traditional Browse options are e Negates the need to browse the network to locate Student PCs e Reduces the time taken to locate Students e Reduces the need to configure and maintain broadcast range entries in the Tutor configuration e More reliable connection method in wireless LAN environments The Tutor uses the current IP address when establishing connections Avoids problems in Wireless environments where Student laptops change access points and are assigned new IP addresses e Students on different subnets are able to join a publish
34. Or Choose View Full Screen from the drop down menu Notes e While in Full Screen Mode a floating toolbar appears e To return to Windowed Mode click the Full Screen button on the floating toolbar or use the hotkeys lt CTRL gt lt LSHIFT gt lt RSHIFT gt Suspend or Stop the Exhibit The Control can choose to end the Show or temporarily suspend it While suspended the Control and or Client can prepare a new demonstration in the background The previously exhibited screen remains on the other Client screens until the Show is resumed To Suspend the Exhibit 1 From the window toolbar or floating toolbar choose Suspend 2 While suspended the Control and Exhibiting Client can work in the background The other Client screens remain frozen 3 To resume the Show choose Resume To Stop the Exhibit 1 From the window toolbar or floating toolbar choose Stop 144 NetSupport School 11 41 Interactive Whiteboard A full screen Interactive Whiteboard is provided enabling the Tutor to use NetSupport School s annotation tools to highlight the screen and show the results to a selected group of Students Note To include the Whiteboard image in the Student Journal Choose Whiteboard File Add to Journal from the Control window drop down menu or click the File icon at the bottom of the Control window and select Add to Journal P NetSupport School MARKETINGOL School Student Group View Whiteboard Layout P
35. Replay Or Double click the Client icon and choose Commands Replay from the drop down menu 2 Navigate to the folder where the Replay Files are stored Select the file to replay Click Open The Replay Window will appear Use the Replay Controls to Start Stop the file a Replay Window Control Panel When viewing a replay file in full screen mode a control panel is displayed this provides the controls for playing the recorded information The control panel contains a replay time index that indicates where in the replay file you currently are and displays information about the file being played Replay Controls onam 1 1 1 0 00 010 0 20 O30 O40 0 50 1 09 O O O OO wl Hep 0 00 38 73 Local 11 Apr 2012 15 50 17 The individual sub menus and available functions are Stop and Play The Stop button is shown when you are playing a replay file and the Play button when the file is stopped Only one of these buttons is displayed at a time The file is played until the end is reached or the Pause Marker is encountered Rewind Start playing the file from the beginning if it is already playing otherwise moves the replay index to the beginning of the file Skip to Previous marker Moves the replay index to the previous activity marker or to the beginning of the file if there isn t one These markers are added at points when lots of activity was recorded at the Client 167 NetSupport School 11 41
36. Resources P Resource Path resources General Tracks the version number of the database school mdb that is currently in use NetSupport School may on occasions supply updates to the internal database and this dialog indicates which version is currently in use Resources By default imported resources such as images video files and sound clips are stored in the Resources area within the NetSupport School program folder This option enables you to edit the path if required 361 NetSupport School 11 41 Import Export Data The Test Designer provides an Import Export facility enabling you to store external backups of data or make information available to other users Exported files can be password protected for security You have the choice of exporting all items in the database or just the exams questions or resources The Import Export options can be accessed from either the Question or Exam Editor Windows Exporting Data 1 Choose File Export from the Designers drop down menu or click the Export icon on the main toolbar 2 The Export Database dialog will appear Select the category of information to be exported and Click Export 3 The Export Wizard will appear Specify the location for the exported data and provide a filename By default files are prefixed with the current date but you may prefer to enter a custom name If required password protect the file add any additional notes and click Next when
37. Student Show Exhibit this Client from the drop down menu Or Right click the Client icon and choose Exhibit this Client The Exhibit dialog will be displayed Exhibit Client mim Ready to start exhibiting Client Sarah to Name Description ae i 2 Andy ry GS Eddie at OP Removing the check mark next to a Client excludes it from the Exhibit Set Show Mode at Client Full Screen S oY Enable Audio Support Select the Clients you wish to include Set the Show Mode to be used at the Client screens Full Screen Windowed or Maximise window Click Exhibit to commence the Show The selected Client s screen will be then be displayed on the screens of the Control and the other Clients Only the Control and the Exhibiting Client will be able to change the screen with the keyboard or mouse Note You can also exhibit a Student s screen to others by clicking the Show Menu icon selecting the Student to exhibit from the drop down list under Exhibit and then clicking Exhibit 143 NetSupport School 11 41 Switching between Full Screen and Windowed Mode At The Control While the Show is in progress the Exhibited screen appears Windowed at the Control If preferred you can switch to Full Screen mode A toolbar appears from which the Control can perform a number of tasks Exhibiting Lisa P m D To Switch Between Full Screen and Windowed Mode 1 Select Full Screen from the toolbar
38. These details are stored in the Client NSS file 1 Inthe Class Wizard click New 2 Click PC Mode 3 The Create Class dialog will appear Create Class x Name Year 7 ICT Description Available Students Students in class Name Address S hesan Name Address bolo INVH INVH INVH INVH NVH NVH 0 INVH42310 0 1 55 5190 INVH423 Add All gt gt fo fo fo Polfelfe fo fo fo fo fo fo fo fo fo 7 Make this the active connection method OK Cancel 4 Specify a name and description for your class 5 Enter a prefix for the Students computer name in the text box leave blank to search all computers 6 Click Browse 7 All Students matching the prefix will appear in the Available Students list 8 Select the Student icons to include in your class and click Add 9 To make this the active connection method select Make this the active connection method 10 Click OK 11 The new class will appear in the Class Wizard Click OK 12 The Tutor will connect to the selected Students and display their icons in the Control window These Students have now been added to the Fixed list of PCs Note You can also choose how to connect to Students in the Tutor Configurator 66 NetSupport School 11 41 To remove Students from the Fixed list of PCs 1 SLOW edd Choose School Manage Class Modify Class from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Manage C
39. Tutor what alert has been raised green for work is complete amber for help needed and red for urgent help needed You can switch these alerts off in the Tutor configuration 180 NetSupport School 11 41 Transferring Files NetSupport School includes sophisticated File Transfer functionality that enables you to transfer files to and from the Control and Client Note File Transfer functionality can be configured by clicking the File Transfer icon on the toolbar and selecting File Transfer options D Jane File Transfer Colo File Folder View Tools Window Help a i ea ee Og Open Create Previous Synchronise Settings ltem Folder Folder Folders Local Computer Contents of C Filter ES Local Computer Name Type File Description Modified EE Desktop dell File Folder 29 03 2012 12 39 12 B PTN A L drvrtmp File Folder 20 01 2005 12 25 06 Saas Mintel File Folder 29 03 2012 12 46 52 fad Backup D Hane File Folder 11 04 2012 10 26 06 Compact Disc E L PerfLogs File Folder 14 07 2009 03 37 06 Bi coinensn on Gepa group EIN L Program Files File Folder 18 06 2012 10 50 40 MT Versions on uk pci group data V L Users File Folder 30 03 2012 09 41 54 EF marketing on 10 0 0 14 Z L Windows File Folder 01 05 2012 03 01 04 HJautoexec BAT Windows Batch File 10 06 2009 22 42 22 B config sys System file 10 06 2009 22 42 22 VIRTPART DAT DAT File 01 12 2010 12 48 56 25 1 O G
40. a prompt and needs to click OK for the install to commence Users cannot cancel this e User can postpone NetSupport School installation You can specify the number of times a user can postpone the installation If the user does choose to postpone they will be re prompted at hourly intervals or the next time they restart the workstation whichever comes earlier Message tab You can specify a custom message to be displayed at each workstation while the installation is in progress NetSupport School 11 41 Restart tab Note If you have asked for verification that the Client is running see Options tab you must choose an option that will force the workstations to be restarted immediately e Advise user to restart machine At the completion of the deployment a message will be displayed at workstations asking the user to restart the PC at the next convenient opportunity Do not choose if above Note applies e Insist user restarts machine A message will be displayed at workstations advising the user to restart the PC to complete the installation e Force restart At the end of the deployment a message is displayed advising users that the workstation will be restarted A time bar is displayed indicating how many seconds it is before the restart commences e Automatic restart if not logged on If the workstation being deployed to is not logged on restart will commence automatically When you have completed all five tabs
41. access attempts in cache memory lifting an internet restriction may not appear to take effect immediately If this happens you may have to restart the browser The same situation may arise if you are using an application which requires Internet access to a site that has been blocked Once the restriction has been lifted you may need to restart the application for it to recognise the change Block all web access Allows you to block all access to the internet for Students An indicator will appear next to the Student icons to confirm internet usage is suspended Note If the Block All icon is displayed on the toolbar clicking this will instantly block all web access for all Students 1 If you want to block web access for individual Students select their icons in the List view 2 Choose Web lt Restrict all Websites from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Restrict All icon at the bottom of the Control window Or Click the Web Access icon on the toolbar and choose Restrict All 3 All Web access will be blocked for the selected Students Note You can also block web access for all connected Students from the Tutor Toolbar Include proxy overrides Allows you to include websites that have been added to the Proxy Settings Exceptions list when using the Approved Website list 1 Choose Web Include Proxy Overrides from the Control window drop down menu 2 Apply the Approved Websites Only list
42. an Image file cannot be located on the Student machine a flashing message This machine has been locked by the control user will be displayed on the Student screen 107 NetSupport School 11 41 Change the graphic to be displayed The image can be changed if necessary by replacing the file or by using the Student Configurator to select an alternative file In the Student Configurator choose Advanced The Image file will display the default file Click Browse to select an alternative file then Open The Image file will display the new file Click OK u AUNE Note If you would like to display an Image file that is not available on Client workstations use the NetSupport School Deploy function to Deploy a Configurator setting to all connected Student workstations 108 NetSupport School 11 41 Viewing Student screens Having connected to a Client you can now control it This is called Viewing The Client s screen will be displayed in a window on the Control workstation NetSupport School will allow you to View multiple Client screens each in its own window simultaneously Note If required a message can be displayed at the Client workstation confirming it is being Viewed See the Configuring The Student section of this manual The Quick view bar allows you to View a connected Client quickly and easily When you connect to a Client a button with the Clients name will appear on the Quick view bar on
43. an operation that will be performed regularly and provides greater flexibility as to which Students the work is sent to To Send Work Using Quick Send 1 Decide which Students to send work to All or a defined group You cannot select individual Students using Quick Send 2 Choose School Send Collect Work Quick Send from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Send Collect Work icon on the Control toolbar and choose Send Work 3 The Quick Send dialog will appear i Quick Send gt Files to Send List the file s to send to the Students Files should include a full path and optionally a wildcard specification You can include multiple specifications by separating them l Cancel with For example Enter C HomeWork to include all files in the Homework folder Or C Study TEST DOC C Study TEST HTM to send the TEST DOC and TEST HTM files from the folder Study C Users Marketing Desktop Diary Template to print pdf a Browse Vv Specify the folder at the Student machine to copy the files to A new folder will be created if necessary 53 Location to Send To M 187 NetSupport School 11 41 List the file s to send to the Students Files should include a full path and optionally a wildcard specification You can include multiple specifications by separating them with Or Click the Browse button to locate the file s Or Enter the path for the file or folder in the edit b
44. applied at this Student machine 270 NetSupport School 11 41 Audio Settings Set the Audio settings for the Client Both the Client and Control workstations must have Audio hardware installed in order to use NetSupport School s audio features NetSupport School Client Configurator nese T Network Settings cris T Room Threshold g Security Audio Microphone User Interfi Scans ae J Journal Quiet Loud amp Terminal Services 2 Compatibility v Enable Audio Hooking Hook audio acceleration Always Cancel Help Volume Threshold microphone sensitivity Microphone volume of microphone Speaker volume of speakers Hook audio acceleration Sets the Hardware acceleration level for the Students Never Leaves the acceleration level at full While Connected The acceleration level will be moved to basic while connected Always The acceleration level will be moved to basic 271 NetSupport School 11 41 User Interface Settings This property sheet is used for customising the interface between the Client and Control NetSupport School Client Configurator es Network Settings Student Icon Room 7 Quiet Mode client not visible on Taskbar D Security t Audio Request Help User Interface Disable Request Help Advanced Hotkeys T Journal T Ak Contol V Left Shift V Right Shift Terminal Services Menu Items Disable Join Class E Disable Chat Disable Replay Disable Journ
45. at the Client You can also set the name and description for the Tutor Performance Allows you to set low bandwidth and colour reduction settings to lower data sent across the networking when performing a View or Show Student Selection This is used to specify the mode to connect to Students when the Tutor program starts NetSupport Protect If installed enables you to disable desktop protection Administration Enables you to set an additional password if the Configuration options are to be protected and to create pre defined Tutor profiles 280 NetSupport School 11 41 Start Options Use these options to specify the startup options for the Tutor Settings for Configuration NetSupport School a t Start Options FN At Startup Start Options Start Viewing 5 Restrictions Network and Wireless Settings D Performance Start Showing Start Scanning at interval of F Display Class Wizard Tu e used to connect to students within a centralised computing environment Requires restart Tutor will be used to connect to students using Tablets Requires restart Tutor will be used to connect to students using Chromebooks Requires restart Cancel Help At Startup Start Viewing If this box is checked when the Control initialises it will connect to all Clients and immediately start Viewing them You can choose which mode to view the Students in Share Watch or Control Start Showing If t
46. by choosing Close at Students Change the current Website running on a Student workstation 1 Ww 202 To change the current url running on a Student workstation choose View Details The Details List view will appear Right click a url icon listed under All Web Sites Choose Activate NetSupport School 11 41 The newly activated url will now replace the current url running on the Student workstation The icon listed under Current Web Site will be replaced with the newly activated url icon Launch a Website on all connected Students 1 2 3 4 Right click a url icon in the Approved Sites List Choose Send to Students The url will be launched on all connected Student workstations In the List view the launched url icon will appear in the current web site list Highlight a url in the Approved Applications List Drag and drop the highlighted url into the List view The url will be launched on all connected Student workstations In the List view the launched url icon will appear in the current web site list Setting up an Approved or Restricted Website List Approved Sites When activated the Student is only able to view the url s specified on this list A page will appear at the Student machines displaying the list of approved sites that they can choose from This will only appear if the Student Toolbar is disabled Restricted Sites When activated the Student is unable to view the
47. can be applied at startup Choose School Configuration Start Options Restrictions from the Control window drop down menu Add an application to your Approved or Restricted List 1 ul Click to add an application to your List Or Right click in the List boxes and select Add Application Or Drag and drop applications from your desktop or Start Menu into the Approved or Restricted List box The Add Application dialog will appear Application Properties mesm Application OK Filename Browse Cancel Description Type in the exe file name e g winword exe under Application or Browse for your chosen application Type in the description e g Microsoft Word Click OK The application icon name and description will appear in your Approved or Restricted List box 221 NetSupport School 11 41 1 Choose View Details Right click an application icon in the List view under Current Application or Running Applications 3 Choose Add to Approved List Or Choose Add to Restricted List 4 The application icon and description will appear in the Approved or Restricted List Note When adding applications on Windows 8 workstations two tabs will be displayed in the Application Properties dialog The Desktop Application tab allows you to add standard Windows applications as detailed above The Windows Store Application tab lists Windows 8 applications Select the required app
48. done to reduce the amount of traffic between Client and Control Reduce the Colour Depth to 16 colours if you are using applications that do not rely on anything other than the standard 16 colour palette Change DOS Font Use this dialog to select the font to use when displaying DOS screens This will be from Windows Clients running Full Screen DOS boxes Windows uses a graphic character set for displaying DOS Screens The higher the resolution that you are running Windows in the larger the font size you will need to set to get an accurate representation of a DOS Screen Change Japanese Font Use this dialog to select the font to use when displaying Japanese DOS screens 301 NetSupport School 11 41 Tutor Keyboard Mouse Settings Settings for Configuration NetSupport School a Remote Control Keyboard Layout J View Unmapped Keyboard X Keyboard Mouse Replay Fik oe Hotkeys Re eee Dat T Left Shift Fie Transfer F Control J Right Shift 4 User Interface S Tutor Autoscroll speed Scroll Delay Mouse Delay Student g g g L bi dealt ot Fastest Min Max Min Infinite Group Leaders Student Toolbar F Disable Num lock synchronisation T Journal Show Update Configuration NetSupport School Carcel Hep Keyboard Layout Select from the list provided a Keyboard layout to be used at the Control during viewing These layouts map keys on the Control to keys on the Client machine If both Client and Con
49. each Student will also be displayed Note Keyboard Monitoring can be setup at startup Choose School Configuration Start Options Restrictions from the Control window drop down menu The lower panes can be minimised to make more room for the Student thumbnails Click the button Monitoring Activity 1 Choose View Mode Typing View from the Control window drop down menu 2 Choose Typing Monitor from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Monitor Activity icon from the bottom of the Control window 3 An icon showing the current application running on the Student workstation will be displayed next to each Student along with any typed content and any Target Inappropriate words will be identified Note If monitoring is enabled and you switch modes an icon will be displayed on the keyboard tab to acknowledge that Keyboard monitoring is currently switched on 129 NetSupport School 11 41 Setting up Word Lists While Keyboard monitoring provides real time tracking of what Students are typing you can ensure Students are on track during the lesson by creating Target or Inappropriate Word lists There may be certain words that you will expect Students to include during a written lesson When a Student types a word on the list it will be identified with a visual indicator green Target or red Inappropriate Notes e Word Lists can be sent to the Student Journal allowing the Student to
50. from the Control window drop down menu and click the Deploy button 42 NetSupport School 11 41 STARTING NETSUPPORT SCHOOL This section will guide you through starting NetSupport School The main point to remember when using NetSupport School is that the workstation that is taking control of other workstations is called the Control or Tutor and the workstations being controlled are called the Clients or Students Note This guide assumes you have already installed NetSupport School If you have not done this do so now See the Installation section for details Starting NetSupport School After installation the Student program is automatically loaded on the Student workstations as Windows starts up To start the NetSupport School Tutor program double click the NetSupport School Tutor icon in your NetSupport School Program Group or choose Start Programs NetSupport School NetSupport School Tutor Console Note On Windows 8 only the Tutor and Tech Console icons will appear in the Start screen You can access the other NetSupport School components by right clicking and selecting All Apps along the bottom of the screen If you want any of the other NetSupport School components to appear on the Start screen right click the item and choose Pin to Start When NetSupport School loads the Welcome Wizard will appear From here you can deploy the Student software onto new computers in your current classroom by clicki
51. hand pane 5 Select the workstations to include in the deploy routine You can use CTRL Click or SHIFT Click Before deciding to include or exclude a workstation you can view its properties by right clicking on the machine name 29 NetSupport School 11 41 Choosing What To Deploy You can choose NetSupport School Package Client Configuration NetSupport School Licence File Uninstall NetSupport School Note The properties for each of the above can also be pre defined if it is not convenient to deploy immediately See Pre define settings for a future deployment Deploy a NetSupport School Package With the required workstations selected 1 Choose Deploy NetSupport School Package from the Deploy Main window drop down menu Or Right click the selected workstations and choose Deploy NetSupport School Package 2 The Deploy Summary dialog will appear Deploy Summary moon This is a summary of the options you have selected Check the details and a click Deploy to start You can change the properties of the deploy by clicking Properties T ype 3 Deploy NetSupport School Package Description E s Cancel NetSupport School m Properties Deploy License Details 3 Licensed to EVAL for 40 Clients Help Deploy Setup Files C Program Files NetS upport NetSupport School Deploy Product Yersion 11 00 0000 Parameter File X This dialog provides a summary of the options you h
52. have a negative impact on the bandwidth allocated to each When using NetSupport School in an un optimised wireless environment the above can result in poor performance and student devices frequently disconnecting from the Tutor console NetSupport School uses advanced techniques to limit the effects of an unreliable wireless network For further information about planning an installation of NetSupport School within a wireless environment please click here Optimising NetSupport School for use in a wireless environment Once you have established a reliable wireless connection between the devices in your classroom there are some settings within the Tutor console that you can change to optimise performance on your wireless network A school will have a finite amount of network bandwidth available viewing the students screens distributing files or broadcasting the teacher s screen simultaneously will consume this bandwidth NetSupport School provides multiple configuration options designed to reduce the amount of data sent across the network which will result in improved performance These options can be found under their respective configuration sections in the Tutor console Note Our online Knowledge Base provides general advice on reconfiguring your access point Please visit www netsupportsoftware com support and refer to Technical Document 495 For a wireless environment it is recommended that both of the options
53. icons Yor 75 Tub EY cY Details Name Cunant Wed She AA Web Shot gs And SY Soge hn e e eT laa Andy 4s psan goog eo uk je lelss V3 Ch s BEC Leaining caine karning soues hip ifr Zid lia mathscom hapy Aven mathscom 2 g 6 Racha fase OCubstep Scared Up Kicks Compilation Funny Re vam fase If the url is currently listed in the Approved or Restricted lists then a visual Green Approved or Red Restricted identifier is shown surrounding the url icon to make identification easier If the List view is in Details layout then a list of all other url s running on the Student workstation is also displayed When viewing any one of the four layout options the order of the Student icons can also be rearranged by the Tutor Right click in the List view and choose Arrange The Tutor is able to change the layout of the icons using the following options By Name Student icons will be arranged in alphabetical order according to their Client name display name Student Register name By Current Web Site Student icons will be arranged in alphabetical order according to the current url the Student is viewing By All Web Sites Student icons will be arranged in alphabetical order according to the running url s on the Student workstation By Policy Student icons will be arranged in alphabetical order according to the current policy set in the Tech Console This option will only be displayed if there is a policy
54. in force 201 NetSupport School 11 41 Selection of one of the above options is identified by a blue dot Auto Arrange If a new Student has been added to the list or a new application is running ona Student machine this option will automatically arrange the icons into the previously selected order above A blue tick will identify selection of this option To deselect this option simply re click Auto Arrange and the tick will disappear Ascending If this option has been selected the student icons will appear in ascending order according to the previously selected option above A blue tick will identify selection of this option To deselect this option simply re click Ascending and the tick will disappear This will arrange the Student icons in descending order Align to Image Centres This option will only be available if a background image has been set to tile This will align the Student icons to the centre of the image Close the current running Website on a Student workstation 1 2 3 4 To close a url on a Student workstation choose View Details The Details List view will appear Right click a url icon under Current Web Site or All Web Sites Choose Close Browser The url will be closed at the Student machine and the url icon will disappear from the List view Note By right clicking on a url icon in the Approved or Restricted List the Tutor is able to close a url on all connected Students
55. is part of the network portion For example if we have an IP address of 10 10 2 21 and a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 IP Address 10 10 2 5 21 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Address In Binary 00001010 00001010 00000010 00010101 Subnet Mask in Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 Network Portion Of IP 00001010 00001010 00000010 00000000 Address Host Portion Of IP Address 00000000 00000000 00000000 00010101 Network Portion Of IP 10 10 2 0 Address Host Portion Of IP Address 0 X 0 0 21 Therefore when we send an IP packet to 10 10 2 21 we are actually sending a packet to device 21 on network 10 10 2 0 In the example above the network 10 10 2 0 can have 256 host addresses 0 to 255 However two of the host addresses the first and last on each IP network are reserved The reserved host address with all bits set to 0 is the network address and the one with bits set to 1 is the broadcast address In our example network of 10 10 2 0 10 10 2 0 is the network address 10 10 2 255 is the broadcast address 77 NetSupport School 11 41 When an IP packet is sent to a networks broadcast address each device on the IP network will receive this packet It is this IP network broadcast address which is used when configuring NetSupport School Control to browse on an IP subnet other than its own 78 NetSupport School 11 41 Implementing NetSupport School in a Terminal Server Environment A NetSupport School Tuto
56. must not load activate or use the software TERM Subject to termination under Termination Clause below the licence shall be perpetual GRANT OF LICENCE Subject to the payment of the applicable licence fees and subject to your abidance by the terms and conditions of this agreement NetSupport Ltd hereby grants to you a non exclusive non transferable right to use one copy of the specified version of the software which you have acquired USE The software is licensed with volume use terms specified in the applicable order acknowledgement product invoice licence certificate or product packaging You may make install and use as many additional copies of the software on the number of devices as the terms specify You must have a reasonable mechanism in place to ensure that the number of devices on which the software has been installed does not exceed the number of licenses you have obtained SERVER USE To the extent that the applicable order acknowledgement product invoice product packaging or licence certificate sets forth you may use the software on a device or on a Server within a multi user or networked environment Server Use A separate licence is required for each device or seat that may connect to the software at any time regardless of whether such licensed devices or seats are connected to the software concurrently or are actually using the software at any particular time Your use of software or hardware that reduces the numb
57. or USB icon at the bottom of the Control window and choose Block Access Read Only Access to CD DVD or USB Devices Provide Students with read only access to CD DVD or USB devices 1 Select the required Students in the List view Choose Device CD USB Read Only from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the CD DVD icon or USB icon at the bottom of the Control window and choose Read Only Unrestricted Access Provide Students with full access to CD DVD or USB devices 1 Select the required Students in the List view Choose Device CD USB Unrestricted from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the CD DVD icon or USB icon at the bottom of the Control window and choose Unrestricted Disable Execute Prevent Students from running programs from CD DVD or USB devices 1 Select the required Students in the List view 251 NetSupport School 11 41 Choose Device CD USB Prevent Execute from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the CD DVD icon or USB icon at the bottom of the Control window and choose Prevent Execute Note To allow access to Execute select Device CD USB Allow Execute from the Control window drop down menu Mute Sound on Student Workstations 1 Choose Device Mute Sound from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Mute Sound icon at the bottom of the Control window Sound will be muted on the Student workstations 252 NetSupport School 1
58. print The print management feature supports multiple printers within a classroom prevents the addition deletion or modification of existing printers and provides printing usage summaries as part of the Student register Notes e Printers must be added to Student workstations before the Tutor connects e A padlock will be displayed next to the Print view icon when there are global policy restrictions in force You can override the restrictions in the Tutor configuration 1 Choose View Mode Print View from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Print Management icon on the left hand side of the Control window ET OQ 0 TS ARLENE NETSUPPORT SCHOOL Aas 243 NetSupport School 11 41 In the List view the Student icons can be viewed in two different ways Choose View Large icons Details or right click in the List view and select one of these options to change the layout of the Student icons When viewing the Large icons layout an icon is displayed next to the Student icon informing the Tutor of the current print activity If the List View is in Details layout a summary of the print activity for each Student is displayed The lower panes can be minimised to make more room for the Student thumbnails Click the Y button To keep track of print usage while in other areas of the Tutor program select Print Show Printers from the Control window drop down men
59. questions appear in the right hand pane of the window From here you can use the buttons to remove a question from the exam sort the questions into the required order preview the question assign a new score to the question or even create a new question Click Finish to store the exam in the Exam Editor window tree view Once created you can use the Exam Editor menu or toolbar options to edit or delete exams preview exams and publish the exam Note Although the newly created exam appears in the Exam Editor tree view it cannot be run at Student workstations until it has been published This bundles the various elements of the exam questions pictures videos etc into a single ZIP file which is then made available in the Testing Console 356 NetSupport School 11 41 Question Score Questions are created with a default score the Question Score dialog allows you to allocate your own score to individual questions 1 In the Exam Wizard select the question you wish to amend the score for and click the Question Score icon Note You must ensure that the Default Scoring System option is un checked 2 The Question Score dialog will appear showing details of the question and the score that would normally be awarded for the question Question Score The default score shows the total score that would normally be awarded for answering this question correctly You can increase the value of this questio
60. s 3 Restrictions Network and Wireless Settings T Performance weet Student Selection NetSupport Protect a Administration 93 Security S gt Profile Browse Mode Browse and connect to Students starting with Fixed List Mode Connect to a list of Students This is a list of student user names Publish Class Publish class and allow Students to join OK Cancel Help Room Mode Connect to Students in Room s Allows you to connect to the machines in a given room Specify the room you wish to connect to Select from a list of rooms Allows you to choose from a list of rooms to connect to at startup Enter the required rooms and separate each value with a comma 289 NetSupport School 11 41 Prompt at startup You will be prompted to specify a room when the Tutor program starts Acknowledge Roaming Students Allows roaming Students to connect to your room Note The Room settings can be configured at the Student in the NetSupport School Student Configurator Browse Mode Browse and connect to Students starting with If this box is checked NetSupport School will browse and immediately connect to all Clients starting with the prefix set in the text box Fixed List Mode Connect to a List of Students Allows you to connect to a fixed list of Student computers by machine name Publish Class Publish Class and allow Students to join With the options above the Tutor dictates which Cl
61. s Testing Module is a powerful utility that enables Tutor s to design tests and examinations with the minimum of effort Incorporating an intuitive Test Designer allowing a Tutor to set customised tests including text picture audio and video questions once the specified Students have completed the test in the pre set time the results are automatically collated marked and made available to the Tutor The following components are available within the Testing Module The Test Designer Launched from the NetSupport School program group the Test Designer is used to create questions and tests The Testing Console Run from within the NetSupport School Tutor program the Testing Console is used to launch the required test at selected Student workstations monitor progress and collate results The Test Player This component runs the test at the Student workstation it loads automatically when the Tutor launches a test 332 NetSupport School 11 41 The Test Designer The NetSupport School Test Designer is the primary interface for Creating questions Creating tests examinations Maintaining stored questions and tests Providing user access to the designer Note Selecting participants running the test at student machines and recording the results of tests is managed within the NetSupport School Tutor program See Testing Console for more information Starting the Test Designer 1 Choose Start Programs Ne
62. session will be removed Chat Window is always visible If checked the Chat window remains on the Clients desktop for the duration of the Chat session Members cannot minimise the window Add to Journal Adds the contents of the Chat session to the Student Journal Confirm which Students to include in the Chat session and select any additional properties that should apply Click OK to start the Chat session 4 The Chat window will appear at the Control and Client workstations P Chat Reminder lelak Chat Window f Andy has joined Cose j Lisa has joined Help Jane has joined TEPA Mrs Brown says Have you all finished inc says lisa No lam stuck on section 4 Mrs Brown Invite Send Message 173 NetSupport School 11 41 The Chat Window This window is displayed at each participating member s machine and lists the progress of the Chat session Only the Control or Group Leader can add or remove Clients from the session Unless the option is disabled in the Chat Properties dialog Clients can choose to leave the session The following options are available from the Chat Window Chat Menu The content of a Chat session can be stored for future reference Choose Save As to create a file containing the text or choose Copy to be able to paste the Chat content into another application or file Each message is restricted to 128 characters Check Auto Send long message to a
63. the NetSupport School Client icon from the taskbar and choosing Commands Add Notes to Journal View Journal or from the Journal icon in the Student Toolbar Note Students will be unable to add notes if the Student Toolbar and Client icon are not visible Viewing a Journal 1 Select Journal View Journal from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Journal icon and select View Journal Note You can print a copy of the current Journal Click the Journal icon in the toolbar and then click the Print icon in the View Journal section 258 NetSupport School 11 41 Synchronise Journals You can synchronise the Tutor Journal with the Students to ensure the Student Journals are up to date Any items that are missing will be added to the Student Journals this will not affect any information that the Student has added Select Journal Synchronise Journals from the Control window drop down menu 259 NetSupport School 11 41 Lesson Planner A NetSupport School Lesson Plan enables a Tutor to structure a session around a pre defined set of tasks with appropriate timings and prompts allocated to each part of the plan Common NetSupport School functionality can be built into the plan such as run test send collect work scan and show To create a Lesson Plan 1 2 260 Choose Planner Manage Planner from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Lesson Plans icon on the Control toolbar
64. the Control Only use this option if you are experiencing problems with the default low level Keyboard option 299 NetSupport School 11 41 Confirm Switch to Full Screen When this box is checked you will be prompted to confirm switching to full screen mode Full Screen Checking this options will force the Control to view a Client in Full Screen mode rather than in a windowed mode Scale to Fit Check this option if you want the contents of the view window to be automatically shrunk to fit the sizeable frame Disconnect when closed Check this option to disconnect from a Client when a View window is closed Screen Scrape NetSupport School s favoured and the most efficient method for capturing screen data is to hook into the Video Driver of the workstation being viewed However there may be occasions when this method will not work because certain applications bypass the driver In these circumstances you can enable screen scrape mode in order to take a snapshot of the screen Although this will have a greater impact on the network it will at least provide an accurate representation of the Client s screen Scrollbars You can turn off scrollbars on the view windows by checking this option This is useful when using Auto Scroll as you gain a little extra workspace Use Compression Check this box to enable compression when viewing a Client s screen The state of this checkbox is also reflected in the General tab Wallpa
65. the pre defined settings See the Tutor Profiles section of this manual for more information e Click Add to create a new Tutor Profile e To remove a Profile select the Profile name and click Delete e To choose the files to include in a new or existing Profile select the Profile name and click Edit The following areas of the product can be profiled Click Change and browse for the appropriate files to include in the Tutor Profile 294 NetSupport School 11 41 File Locations Applications File Contains details of approved and restricted application packages Default file name NetSupport School app See Application Control Module for more information about creating pre defined lists of approved or restricted Applications Web Site File Contains details of approved and restricted web sites Default file name NetSupport School web See Web Control Module for more information about creating pre defined lists of approved or restricted websites Survey File Identifies the location of stored Student Surveys Default file name NetSupport School sul See Student Surveys for more information Layout File Stores the position of the Client machines as they appear in the Control window and if specified a background image Default file name LAYOUT LYT See Working with Classroom Layouts for more information Word List File Contains details of Target and Inappropriate keywords Default file name NetSupport School wdl See Key
66. the required positions Choose Layout Lock Layout from the control window drop down menu Client icons will be fixed in position and unable to be moved Note The current classroom layout can be printed select Layout Print Layout from the Control window drop down menu Setting a background As well as tailoring the position of Client icons in the Control List view to reflect the layout of the classroom you can choose alternative images to decorate the background and enhance the layout of the icons Note Background layouts support BMP PNG and transparent images To set a background 1 2 58 Choose Layout Set Background from the Control window drop down menu The Set Background dialog will appear Set Background rede Background Image Image file location Support School Obackground pne Browse l Apply J Width 300 Height 200 Cancel _ Image position on display Bottom Right m _ Align Clients to tiled Images A n Background Colour Top o Set Colour Bottom Set Colour Preview oO NetSupport School 11 41 Select the location of the image you wish to use The default BMP files are stored in the NetSupport School program folder A preview of the selected image is provided Choose Image position on display to select the position of the image If you select Tile you can also choose to centre the Client icons on the image If r
67. to Students s sssssssssrssrrssrsrrnerurnrnrrnernrnrsrrnsrnre 176 Send a message whilst Viewing s s sssssssrsssssrrssrernssrrsrnnrnnsrrerrerens 177 Creating Preset MeSSaGe S scatece case eadlantedeastendwestideadinasneeaiadiae 177 Help REQUCSUS siiccsia tienes ananin aa a Ea ra Ea NE EA A ONEA Lia 179 Transferring Files Ascv s acikesd aaa an adap eaaa aaa eas iad kaaa 181 Distributing File Ske eia E E E a aE a Ea Ea 184 NetSupport School 11 41 Sending and Collecting Work cccceeee cece eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ease teen eeeeeeaeaea 187 Remotely Launching applications on Student workstations 192 User Defined Tools aetna a a E a AEE AA NaRa 196 Rebooting or Logging out StudentS ssssesssssrsssssrrsrrsrrnernerrrrrsernre 198 Web Control MOdUI iiciscen ncananicattesd aa aaa 199 Setting up an Approved or Restricted Website List ee 203 View Web HIStory Se reran nanana aa Sueweevenmnbusti iiss degeereeusar gests 210 CO BrOWSER ioraa gehen aaa E AREA Mite Ma tane a TE i tae dai 212 Using the CO BrowSer iseinean aaa edad veces ana de etad EO ainas aia 213 Lock Unlock Students in the CO DroOWSEL ccccceseeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeees 214 Application Control Module ccccceeeeeeeeeee eee eee eee eeeaea ea eaeaeaeeeeeies 216 Setting up Approved or Restricted Applications ceeeeeeee eee 221 View Application HiStOry ccceceeeeeee ntn eens eens eens Ea 225 StUd
68. to be assigned to Optionally enter a name that identifies this Student Click Save so Note To ensure you retain full visibility of your students internet use it is recommended that you disallow Incognito Mode in the Chrome OS User Settings via Google Apps for Education If you selected the Chrome Students Only licence type during installation of the NetSupport School Windows Tutor the Tutor will only display the features that are supported for Google Chrome Students From the NetSupport Tutor Windows or Chrome OS the teacher can perform the following functionality on students Chromebooks e View a crystal clear thumbnail of each student machine in a single view Click on a thumbnail to discreetly view activity on that machine Remote Control As well as discreetly monitoring the Students screens Watch Mode teachers can now interact with the students desktops with real time remote control Share Mode Ideal for providing 1 1 help and support to students as needed e Show the Teacher s screen Ensure student attention and focus when presenting by showing the teacher s desktop to selected student screens e Show an application to selected Students 84 NetSupport School 11 41 Lock the students mice and keyboards when instructing Send an instant survey or request for feedback to each student and display results in real time Send an attention grabbing message or instruction to each St
69. to create a Journal x Cancel Help Margins mm If required you can adjust the top bottom left and right margins for the Journal Page Size Select the required page size for the Student Journal Font Size points Set the font size to be used in the Journal Jpeg Quality 0 100 Allows you to set the quality of images in the Journal this is set to 100 by default Journal Folder Specify where you want the Student Journal to be stored 277 NetSupport School 11 41 Terminal Services Settings You can configure the settings for the Student Terminal Server here Note Terminal Server and other thin clients may not be configured to use the NetSupport School Name and Connectivity Server NetSupport School Client Configurator e TD Network Settings Terminal Services Settings won Z Run Student in Console session Security 5 Audio User Interface v Run Student in remote sessions Base Pott 25405 Advanced Student Name 5 Journal ek oh Pk Terminal Services Use lookup file to set room Cox cereal o Hb Terminal Services Settings Run Student in Console Session Unchecking this option will stop the Client from running in a Console session Run Student in remote sessions Unchecking this option will stop the Client from running in remote sessions Note The above two options are not supported on Windows MultiPoint Server 2012 Base Port Enter
70. url s specified on this list However all other sites even those that are not on the Approved List can be viewed 203 NetSupport School 11 41 Notes e By default keywords are entered to prevent allow a Student to view a URL that includes these keywords This can be used to deal with websites that are re directed e To ensure Students are only viewing the appropriate pages in a website you can approve restrict Sub URLs specific web pages and have different parts of the same website approved restricted i e www bbc co uk learning can be restricted but www bbc co uk learning history can be approved Students will only be able to view pages relating to history and not view pages relating to Science or English e Web restrictions can be applied at startup Choose School Configuration Start Options Restrictions from the Control window drop down menu Add a Website to your Approved or Restricted List 1 Click to add a url to your Approved or Restricted list Or Right click in the list boxes and select Add Website 2 The Add Web Site dialog will appear Website Properties eee Website Properties ran sg Co www netsupportschool com View Cancel Description Hep Advanced Properties Keywords netsupportschool Keywords are used to identify the website when blocking or redirecting it 2 Type in the website address under URL e g www netsupportschool com Click View to c
71. window drop down menu choose Student Unlock Keyboard Mouse Or From the toolbar choose Unlock Or Right click the selected Student icons and select Unlock Keyboard Mouse To blank a Student s screen when locked 1 Choose View Current Settings User Interface Student from the Control window drop down menu 2 Check Blank screen when Locking mouse and keyboard Click OK 4 Select the Student s or Groups of Students you wish to lock Ww 106 NetSupport School 11 41 From the Control window drop down menu choose Student Lock Keyboard Mouse Or From the toolbar press the Lock icon Note If you View a locked Student the blank Student screen setting will no longer apply To blank a Student screen when Viewing choose Student Blank screen from the View window drop down menu To display a graphic when locking a Student workstation By default a graphic is displayed on a Student s screen when the Tutor uses the Lock function When a Client s keyboard and mouse have been locked a default image nss_lock_image_jpg appears on their screen i 1 Choose View Current Settings User Interface Student from the Control window drop down menu 2 Clear the Display image when locking mouse and keyboard option 3 Click OK 4 The Student s screen will now be blanked when locked Notes If you View a locked Student the display graphic on a Student screen will no longer apply If
72. working with defined groups of Clients the Control can assign Group Leader status to a selected member of the group Settings for Configuration NetSupport School Pe SSS 4 19 Remote Control v Enable Group Leaders 2 View v Show visual Group Leader connections 3 Keyboard Mouse s 4 Hi Replay Fies Select the functions a group leader can perform within their group p Audio Functions t File Transfer Y Show a User Interface I Scan Tut v Message gt a 7 Chat Student V Execute Tutor Assistant J Send Collect Work Group Leaders YZ Audio Show Announce and View Student Toolbar Joumal W Journal Viewing modes show 7 Share v Control v Watch cre Heb Enable Group Leaders Enables the Group Leader function Show visual Group Leader connections Visual Group Leader connections can be displayed allowing you easily see the link between a Group Leader and their Students in all views All Group Leader features are enabled by default but can be removed by un checking the appropriate box Functions Allows you to select the functions that are available to the Group Leader 316 NetSupport School 11 41 Student Toolbar Settings Configure the settings for the Student toolbar Settings for Configuration NetSupport School pee 4 T Remote Control The Student Toolbar is displayed on the Student s desktop It can show View details about the class current lesson as well as Internet Application
73. 07 Tutor User Interface SettingS ccccececeeeee cece e eee eects este eens eeeaeaeas 310 Student User Interface SettingS ccceeeeee cece ee ee eee e ee ee ease ee eneeeeaeaea 312 Tutor Assistant Settings nr acr a OA EASE 314 Group Leader SettinGS wccscciccccncciceteneerseeevecneeeceeen severe eneavenwenecrereess 316 Student Toolbar SettingS ccccceeeee ee ee eset ee ee ee ee ee ease ease aAa aa Eini 317 Tutor Journal Settings iii ceccestatanetsceuedcetetenuvedsrweadsevavacuticenenestennele 318 SHOW SCtliNGS 22a e a etihoriae dante lad aaa dacdaduir a E i 320 TECH CONSOLE ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeaeaeauaeaeaeeseeeeeeeenens 322 Hardware and Software Inventory c eeeeeeee cece este eeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeaes 325 Policy MANAGEMENE wstec icc cetececaderdiedeasesadnsnegenad eclacietadelectacdeceseatades 327 Student Security SettingS siisii iniinis eee 329 Remote Command Prompt WindOW c eceeee cece ee ee ease eae eeeeeeaeaes 331 TESTING MODULE ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeaeaeaeaeaeeeeeeeeeeenens 332 The Test Designer esaia aaa aaa ata canes devvaveuved sesebasuteuanebacsnenes dente 333 The Questions INterface cceccceceeee eects eee eee eens eaten ene ea tana 335 The EXAM INt rtace issar riai aa GA ETNE E aaia 353 Setting Up USer ACCOUNTS aniis aeaa i aooaa 360 Admin OPtlonS riinan daana a aaia eiaa aa aia 361 Import Export Datarea aai ia ia eiaa a aA andada ie 362 Th
74. 1 41 Tutor Profiles NetSupport School allows you to set up multiple Tutor Profiles for different Control Users each with a pre defined set of options On starting the Tutor program if multiple profiles have been created a dialog is displayed that allows the user to select which profile to use The main benefit of creating a profile is to be able to store ready made lists of Approved Restricted Applications Websites and keywords rather than have the user create these at the start of each lesson Having created your Application Website or Word List as detailed in the Web Control Application Control and Keyboard Monitoring sections the files can then be added to a Tutor Profile Note As well as Website Application and keyword lists other areas of the program that can be profiled are Layouts Student Surveys Client Lists Group Lists the location for storing test results exams and Class lists To Create a Tutor Profile 1 Create the files containing details of approved restricted web sites applications etc that are to be included in the profile 2 Choose School Configuration Administration Profile from the Control window drop down menu The list of existing Tutor Profiles will appear NetSupport School is the default 3 To create a new profile select Add The Create New Configuration dialog will appear 4 Enter a name for the profile Functionality for the profile can be copied from an existing Tutor
75. 2 Select Sign Out from the available options Confirm that you want to unregister the Students 54 NetSupport School 11 41 Registration Report Student registration and Printer usage details can be viewed in a report but this will be lost when the Control disconnects 1 Choose School Student Register from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Student Register icon on the toolbar 2 Select Registration Report from the available options IG Registration Report gt Lek Student Registration Details Teacher Name Mrs Wright Lesson Title ICT Level 2 Room 42c Objectives Date Tue 26 Jun 2012 Time 12 15 55 A Login Computer class Student Pages Jobs Name Name Name ID No Printed Printed Andy pcie f mvHass INVH338 7 Show printer usage Save Pinta _ Chose 4 Notes e If you want to store a copy of the report ensure that the Auto Save Register option is enabled on the Student Register dialog when requesting the Student details The report can be stored in CSV HTML or XML format e To quickly print a copy of the report click the Student Register icon and then click Quick Print To display the Login name of Students When registering Student details rather than prompt them for their actual name you can default to their login name 1 Choose View Current Settings User Interface Tutor from the Control window drop down m
76. 27x1169in lt liad 4 1of1 E Starting a Journal The Journal will automatically start when any of the Send to Journal options are selected 1 Select Journal Create New Journal from the control window drop down menu Or Click the Journal icon and select Start Note If the Tutor Console is closed or the Student is restarted the current Journal will be closed You can open an existing Journal select Journal Open existing Journal or click the Journal icon and choose the previous Journal from the drop down list and click Open 257 NetSupport School 11 41 Adding Notes Images to the Journal 1 Select the required Students in the List view 2 Choose Student Add notes to Journal from the Control window drop down menu Or Select Journal Add Notes from the Control window drop down menu Or Right click and select Add notes to Journal Or Click the Journal icon in the toolbar and click the Note icon in the Add section 3 The Add Notes to Journal dialog will appear 4 Enter the required notes and or image select which Students to send this to and click OK Notes e You can quickly add a note to all Student Journals Click the Journal icon on the toolbar enter the required note under Quick Note and click Add e You can remove the last item added to the Journal Select Journal Undo last add from the Control window drop down menu Students can view and add notes to their Journal by selecting
77. Activity 1 While listening to audio activity click the Record button in the Audio Playback window The Audio Playback window will show that you are now recording the audio To stop recording and to carry on listening to the audio click the Stop button in the Audio Playback window Note To access all stored recordings click the Recordings link in the Audio Playback window 152 NetSupport School 11 41 Volume Control You can control the volume at both the Tutor and the Student 1 Click the Volume icon at the bottom of the Control window Adjust the volume controls You can mute sound and lock the Student volume from here Or While listening to audio use the slider bars in the Audio Playback window to adjust the volume Mute Sound at the Student Sound can be muted at all Student machines 1 Choose Audio Mute Sound from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Mute Sound icon at the bottom of the control window 1 Click the Volume icon at the bottom of the Control window 2 Select the Mute option Note By default sound will be muted at Students when locking the mouse keyboard or blanking screens This option can be disabled in the Student User Interface Configuration settings Customise Thumbnail Size Student thumbnails can be resized to suit personal preferences This is particularly useful when connected to large numbers of Student machines Use the slider on the Size icon at the
78. Files should be stored 304 NetSupport School 11 41 Audio Settings This property sheet provides configuration options for using Audio support Settings for Configuration NetSupport School a Remote Control Udane oF View Threshold g Keyboard Mouse Replay Files Microphone a Audo Speaker g File Transfer 4 User Interface Quiet oad Tutor Test MMI G S Student Enable Tutor Assistant Of Talk only T Group Leaders On Listen only Student Toolbar Change Transmission Format Journal T Show Update Configuration NetSupport School The Audio settings can be configured in two ways 1 To apply the settings for all Client sessions choose View Current Settings Audio from the Control window drop down menu 2 To apply the settings for an individual Client session View the Client and choose View Settings for Client Audio from the View window drop down menu Volume Threshold microphone sensitivity Microphone volume of microphone Speaker volume of speakers Test Check this box to test all of the above settings 305 NetSupport School 11 41 Enable On Turn Audio on Off Turn Audio off Talk Turn the Control Audio to Talk function only Listen Turn the Control Audio to Listen function only Selecting the Change transmission format buttons allows you to change the transmission format Use only the level you need for acceptable quality High quali
79. From here you can see who has responded and mark their answers 234 NetSupport School 11 41 A Question and Answer dialog is displayed at the Student showing the current question type and any awards the Student has received Students will be able to see the current state of all Students for each question You can also choose to show the results to Students this can be set in the Question amp Answer Options dialog Note Questions can also be started from the Q amp A menu Select Q amp A Question Type from the Control window drop down menu or click the Types button at the bottom of the Control window Question and Answer Module First to Answer Question Type The teacher asks a verbal question and the Students click to answer The top x fastest responders will be displayed and the quickest Student is asked for their answer You then decide whether this is correct or not and rewards can be awarded or deducted Note Questions can be bounced to the next quickest Student when more than one Student has been selected This can be done automatically by selecting the Automatically bounce to next Student option in the Ask the question dialog or manually by selecting Q amp A Bounce Question from the Control window drop down menu or clicking the Bounce icon at the bottom of the Control window A thinking time limit can be applied the Answer button is disabled during this period giving Students a chance to think about the
80. NetSupport Protect On Connecting Securty NetSupport Protect administrator password NetSupport Protect prever amp a operating system _ Geneel Help Disable NetSupport Protect Decide whether to switch protection off when you first connect to the Student machines or when you open a view session Security A NetSupport Protect configuration should be secured with an Administrator password You will need to enter that password here as confirmation that you are authorised to turn desktop protection off To find out more about NetSupport Protect and to download a free trial copy visit www netsupportprotect com 291 NetSupport School 11 41 Administration Security Settings Protect the Configuration The Control Configuration can be protected by setting a password This acts independently of the Control password if set Settings for Configuration NetSupport School me jort and Startup options Set Set a Set aata Redirect URL URL that restricted cance Hee Check the Protect box to set the password Each time a Control User subsequently wants to make changes to the Configuration they will be prompted to enter the password Options Password Setting a password will mean that the next time the Control program is started the user will be prompted to enter a password If they do not enter the correct password they will not be able to start the Con
81. NetSuppsst in monitor support NetSupport School Product Manual Version 11 41 NetSupport School 11 41 Manual COPYRIGHT C 2014 NetSupport Ltd All rights reserved Information in this document is subject to change without notice NetSupport Ltd reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in the content hereof without obligation to notify any person or persons of such revisions or changes The software described in this document is supplied under a licence agreement and is protected by international copyright laws You may copy it only for the purpose of backup and use it only as described in the Licence agreement Any implied warranties including any warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose are limited to the terms of the express warranties set out in the licence agreement Program COPYRIGHT C 1991 2014 NetSupport Ltd All rights reserved Trademarks NetSupport is a registered trademark of NetSupport Ltd Windows Windows 2003 2008 XP Vista Windows 7 and 8 are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Other products trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners NetSupport School 11 41 Software Licence Agreement Please read this agreement before using your copy of NetSupport Software This is a legal agreement between you and NetSupport Ltd If you do not wish to be bound by the terms of this licence agreement you
82. Publish 4 The Save As dialog will appear Give the exam a suitable name this is the name that will appear in the Testing Console when selecting an exam to run Click Save to create the Zip file 359 NetSupport School 11 41 Setting Up User Accounts Multiple Test Designer user accounts can be created in addition to the default Admin logon User name admin Password admin Choose File Users from the Designers drop down menu or click the Users icon on the main toolbar The User Management dialog will appear from where you can Add Edit or Delete Users User Name kf admin NSS Admin Click Add and enter a user name generally the person s full name along with a login name and password Decide whether to assign Admin Rights This gives the user access to all features within the Designer along with the ability to edit delete questions and exams created by other users Non admin users can only create exams 360 NetSupport School 11 41 Admin Options Questions exams etc are stored in an internal database supplied with NetSupport School This dialog provides version information about the Database You also have an option to edit the path where imported resources images video sound clips are stored Ae Please select an item in the list to edit its value Please note that some items are for e information only Trovon General rA Database version Last Modified 26 05 2006 Version Num 4 S
83. Right click the selected Client icons and choose File Transfer Or If you are Viewing the Client select the File Transfer icon on the View window toolbar 181 NetSupport School 11 41 3 The File Transfer window to that Client will open 4 From the Client Tree view select the destination drive or folder into which the items will be copied Note The path to any open folders Explorer windows on the Client desktop is displayed at the top of the File Transfer window to enable quick selection This is only supported on Windows Vista and above 5 From the Control List select the item s to be copied to the Client 6 Click the toolbar Copy File button 7 A confirmation dialog will be displayed click Yes Notes The required item s can also be dragged from the Control view and dropped into the appropriate folder in the Client view When a file is transferred to Android Students it will be copied across to the File Explorer for the Students to access To copy files and Folders from a Client to a Control 1 Select the required Client in the List view Click the File Transfer icon on the toolbar and choose File Transfer Or Choose Student File Transfer from the Control window drop down menu Or Right click the selected Client icons and choose File Transfer Or If you are Viewing the Client select the File Transfer icon on the View window toolbar The File Transfer window to that Client
84. SUPPORT a SCHOOL A Listening to student pcijle Your volume 0 00 00 33 59 Windows Media Player C Program Files Windows Media Player wmplayer xe Student volume a inounce Unavailable History Year 2 4 Students Alia Tutor Assistant o A thumbnail of each connected Student screen is displayed the microphone or headphone icon will flash on the Student thumbnail showing there is audio activity at the Student workstation 151 The NetSupport School 11 41 lower panes can be minimised to make more room for the Student thumbnails Click the Y button Notes You can remove the microphone and headphone icons from Student thumbnails by clicking the microphone and or headphone icon at the bottom of the Control window removing the green tick Audio Monitoring can be setup at startup Choose School Configuration Start Options Restrictions from the Control window drop down menu Listen to Student Audio 1 2 Select the required Student in the List view Select Audio Listen to Student from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Listen icon on the required Student thumbnail Or Click the Listen icon at the bottom of the Control window Details of the Student you are listening to the active application and how long you have been listening is displayed in the Audio Playback window To stop listening click the Stop icon at the bottom of the Control window Record Audio
85. School NetSupport School Student Configurator Journal On Windows 8 machines right click in the Start screen and choose All Apps at the bottom of the screen Click the NetSupport School Student Configurator icon Settings for Configuration NetSupport School a ep Bemate Conta Z Enable Student Joumal Wen 7 Enable Tutor Journal Keyboard Mouse Replay Fies Tutor Settings Audo Margins mm Page size File Transfer Top Ja Defaut x 4 User Interface Bottom 15 Font size points 3 Tutor Left 15 11 3 Student t Tutor Assistant Right 1 JPEG Quality 1 100 t Group Leaders 75 Student Toolbar Joumal Joumal Folder _ Show Journals A Joumal Logo Browse logo appears at the top of the Joumal cone He Enable Student Journal Activates the Journal for the Students Enable Tutor Journal If enabled a copy of the Journal will be stored for the Tutor to view Tutor Settings Margins mm If required you can adjust the top bottom left and right margins for the Journal Page Size Select the required page size for the Student Journal 318 NetSupport School 11 41 Font Size points Set the font size to be used in the Journal Jpeg Quality 0 100 Allows you to set the quality of images in the Journal this is set to 100 by default Journal Folder Specify where you want the Student Journal to be stored Journal Logo Allows you to add an image that will appear at the top of the Journal 319 NetSuppo
86. School but the actual content will be provided by Educators for Educators which will ensure it reflects up to date and relevant curriculum content Select Help Online Resources from the Designers drop down menu to access the site 334 NetSupport School 11 41 The Questions Interface You can create questions in a variety of formats and these can be enhanced by the use of imported pictures videos and sound clips The four icons available in Question Mode enable you to e Create Questions e Edit a selected item e Delete a selected question e Change the way questions are arranged in the Tree This can be by Author Question Type Subject or Level of Difficulty Subjects and Topics can be added to the Tree at any time or if you are not sure which subject groups your questions will belong to you can add them when creating a question To add Subjects directly to the tree select Questions New Subject from the drop down menu or right click in the Questions window and select New Subject Multiple Topics can then be added beneath a Subject by right clicking on the Subject name and selecting New Topic or choosing Questions New Topic from the drop down menu 335 NetSupport School 11 41 Create Questions A choice of eight question styles are available each with a Question Wizard that steps you through the required process To create a question choose Questions Create Question from the drop down menu click t
87. Show Video Or Click the Show Menu icon on the Control toolbar and choose Show Video The Show Video dialog will appear NetSupport School Show Video Se ere Select the video to Show E Video File C Users Marketing Desktop Tech console mpg Cancel a Help In the Video File field enter the location and name of the required video you can select Open to browse for the file Click Show A check will be made to ensure that the video file is available at the Student If not the video file will be automatically copied to the Student machine When the video file is launched the Video Player Control Panel appears Standard operations are available Play Stop Pause etc Note While the video is running the Client workstations are locked Playing Videos via Explorer NetSupport School also provides an option to run videos from outside the Tutor program Simply navigate to the required video file in Explorer and launch it from the folder where it is stored 1 Navigate to the folder containing the video file 2 Right click the required video and select Show with NetSupport School from the drop down list 159 NetSupport School 11 41 a A Show with NetSupport School new Queue It Up 4 Add to Playlist g Copy to CD or Device plannet amp l CuteFTP upload gt planner_low 3 The Tutor program will load connect to the Known Clients and display the Sh
88. Show will be suspended Client screens will still display the Control screen 4 Click Show Leader 5 The Show Leader dialog will be displayed z NetSupport School Show Leader Select the Show Leader Show is currently suspended None Se Cancel This Client m 4 8 Andy ie 8 Lisa 2 xP SP3 WARNING The Client leading the show will have full access to your Desktop Note If the Show icon on taskbar option has previously been selected you can create a Show Leader by right clicking on the icon and choosing Show Leader 6 Click This Client and select the Client to make Show Leader Note The Show Leader will have full access to your desktop 7 Click OK 141 NetSupport School 11 41 8 The message You are leading the Show will appear at the selected Clients machine 9 Click Resume to restart the Show The Show Leader and Control can now interact together in leading the Show 142 NetSupport School 11 41 Exhibit Showing a Student s screen on Student screens With NetSupport School it is possible to Show the Control s screen to a number of connected Clients It is also possible to show an individual Student s screen on selected or all Students screens For example Client 1 has produced some work which you wish to show to rest of the class To Show a Students screen 1 2 Select the Client whose screen you want to show to the other Clients Choose
89. Signed In 14 41 34 18 Andy poijle INVH288 Windows MSN Live Messenger j earp netsupportsoftware com Signed In 14 41 32 18 peijle INVH368 Windows MSN Live Messenger earpjane hotmail com Message Sent 14 28 16 18 peijle INVH368 Windows MSN Live Messenger eamjane hotmail com Message Received 14 28 07 18 3 peijle INVH368 Windows MSN Live Messenger earpjane hotmail com Message Sent 14 27 42 18 paile INVH368 Windows MSN Live Messenger earpjane hotmail com Message Received 14 27 17 18 INVH368 pcijle INVH368 Windows MSN Live Messenger earpjane hotmail com Signed In 14 25 13 18 F 3 F 3 Sebboel gt mi gt mp F Tika Em e Grwec He _Gose _ The available options are Show History for The list can be viewed by currently Selected Client or All Connected Clients Refresh While viewing the list click Refresh at any time to update the display 126 NetSupport School 11 41 Save To keep a permanent record of the displayed items you can save the details to a text file before disconnecting Export Exports data to a CSV file allowing the data to be imported if needed Print Prints details of the currently displayed items Close Closes the History dialog but details will continue to be recorded while the Control is connected 127 NetSupport School 11 41 Keyboard Monitoring Allows the Tutor to monitor Students keyboard usage while using any approved application prov
90. Students answer all the questions within the time limit you can Stop the exam rather than wait for the clock to tick down Report This option gathers the results when the exam has finished When the Tutor stops the exam or the time limit elapses 365 NetSupport School 11 41 Test Reports Window The Reports window enables the Tutor to review the results of an exam You also have the option to allow Students to see their own results WG Test Report E e A ae 5 Print Report Class Summary a 4 _ Students Reports 2 Emma Class summary report Jane Earp INVH338 Mark INVH368 amp Sarah XP SP3 Exam name Exam duration a Example Test 10 minutes g Number of Total points question 18 value of exam 54 Student Name Questions Score answered S h By selecting the required item in the Tree view you can display two types of report a Class Summary and individual Student summaries Each can be printed and copies are also stored in HTML format in the NetSupport NetSupport School Tests Reports folder Note An alternative location for the reports can be specified in the Tutor Profiles option Class Summary This provides a summary of each Students result in tabular format The report details the number of questions in the exam the number of points available questions other than multi choice are worth 1 point for each correct answer and itemises each Students score I
91. Support Protect gt z Print Unrestricted Access F Use central policy Devices CD DVD USB Block Al Access x Use central policy Instant Messenger Unrestricted Access Z Typing Monitored X Audio On oa Cancel Help Apply global policy Applies the global policy restrictions that have been created in the Tech Console 282 NetSupport School 11 41 Applications Set the level of access for the Application Control Module Apply global policy Applies the global policy restrictions that have been created in the Tech Console Print Choose the level of access for the Printer Management mode Use global policy Applies the global policy restrictions that have been created in the Tech Console Devices CD DVD USB Choose the level of access for the Device Control mode Use global policy Applies the global policy restrictions that have been created in the Tech Console Audio Enable Audio monitoring or mute audio at the Students machines Typing Choose whether or not to monitor Students keyboard usage in Keyboard Monitoring mode Instant Messenger Set the level of access for the Messenger Monitoring mode 283 NetSupport School 11 41 Network and Wireless Settings This is primarily used for setting the network transport that the Control will use for communicating with the Clients It must be the same as that set at the Clients You can also set the name and descrip
92. The default registered port for NetSupport School is 5405 Note If you are using routers you must ensure that they are configured to pass through data using this port Include Chromebooks NetSupport School provides support for Google Chromebooks This option includes Google Chromebooks when performing a search Note The IP address of the Name Server Gateway along with the matching security key needs to be entered click Settings Use Name amp Connectivity Server Gateway Enable this option if you want to search for Students whose IP addresses are registered with a defined Name Server Gateway The currently configured browse at Start up option will still apply but rather than perform a UDP browse of the network the Tutor program will search the Name Server for Students matching the specified criteria Click Settings and enter the IP address of the Name Server Gateway along with the matching security key Browsing Subnets used when browsing for students When you are running a network with multiple subnets or addresses you need to configure the broadcast addresses for each effective network When a browse is performed the broadcast messages are sent to these addresses 285 NetSupport School 11 41 Accelerate Browse Increases the browse and connection speed to Clients This is set by default Note A warning icon will highlight machines you have been unable to connect to Mouse over the icon to display
93. To launch the Replay conversion utility select Start Programs NetSupport School NetSupport School Replay On Windows 8 machines right click in the Start screen and choose All Apps at the bottom of the screen Click the NetSupport School Replay icon Note Replay Files store screen images and can therefore become very large Good housekeeping plays a vital role in maintaining files of this nature It is recommended that old files are deleted ona regular basis 162 NetSupport School 11 41 Record Replay Files For All Students This procedure enables the Tutor to create a Replay file at any Student workstation that it remote controls 1 Choose View Current Settings Replay Files from the Control window drop down menu The Replay Files dialog will appear Enable the Record Replay Files check box A Replay file will be created each time the Tutor opens a view session at any Student machine Include Audio In addition to the screen mouse and keyboard activity if the workstation is configured for Audio you can record any microphone narration from the Tutor Check this box to enable Note Desktop sounds music etc are unable to be recorded Prefix Files With Client name In order to identify each Replay file filenames are prefixed with the Client name and the date time of the recording Alternatively by unchecking this box the files will be named sequentially in the format 00000001 rpf etc In Folder Spec
94. To remove the restrictions for individual Students select their icons in the List view Choose Applications Unrestricted Access from the drop down menu Or Click the Allow All icon at the bottom of the Control window The green or red indicator will be removed from the selected Student icons Note Removing a restriction may not appear to take effect immediately You may need to restart the application for it to recognise the change Create a new Application List 1 2 3 To create a new Application List choose Applications Create New Application List A dialog will appear Enter a file name and click Save A new blank Application List will appear Note Application Lists can be assigned to different Control Users by setting up a Tutor Profile See Tutor Profiles 223 NetSupport School 11 41 Open an existing Application List 1 2 3 To open an existing application list choose Applications Load Existing Applications List Highlight the relevant file and click Open The existing application list will appear Save an Application List 1 To save the current Application List choose Application Save Application List as 2 A dialog will appear Enter a file name and click Save 3 The current Application List will be saved Notes Any changes that have been made to the new or existing Applications List will be automatically saved when a new Applications List is create
95. Users File Folder 30 03 2012 09 41 54 L Windows File Folder 01 05 2012 03 01 04 Slautoexec BAT Windows Batch File 10 06 2009 22 42 22 B config sys System file 10 06 2009 22 42 22 LI VIRTPART DAT DAT File 01 12 2010 12 48 56 25 165 1 lt m Name Destination Folder Description Client Platform Battery Details Andy CA Windows XP On AVC 97 ch Jane cA Windows XP James cA Windows Vista a Ready 3 Files 25 165 858 bytes 1 selected 10 bytes o From the Local pane Tree view select the item s to be copied to the Clients The location on the Client workstations where the files folders are copied to is called the Destination Folder Unless otherwise specified the Client Destination Folder will be the same as the item s location on the Control workstation If the Client does not have the same Folder available the item s will be copied to the C Drive by default and the folders automatically created Or To set a specific destination folder on the Client workstation select the Client icon in the Remote pane and click Set Destination in the toolbar Specify a destination then click OK Click Copy To Distribute Files to a selected number of Clients 1 Click the File Transfer icon drop down arrow on the toolbar selecting File Distribution from the list of features Or If displayed select the File Distribution icon on the toolbar The File Distribution window will appear 185 NetSupport School 11 41 In
96. a import J Applications Mode Restricted gt Name z Description ddd a M wmplayer P Eat import USB CD DVD Unrestricted Unrestricted Block access Block access Read only Read only Prevent execute T Prevent execute Printer Blocked x Author Marketing Modfied Fri Jun 22 10 25 01 2012 Hep ok _ Cancel Creating a Policy 1 Select Security Policy Management from the Tech Console drop down menu 2 The Policy Management dialog will appear 3 Set the required restrictions 327 NetSupport School 11 41 Applying a Policy You can apply the policy to all connected machines Note Teacher machines can be excluded from a policy Select the Don t apply policies to teacher computers check box in the Tech Console General Settings dialog 1 Select the required Client s to apply the policy to Or 1 Switch the List view to Report mode 2 Right click in the Policy column and select Apply Policy Clear a Policy Clears the current policy from the selected Client s 1 Switch the List view to Report mode 2 Select the required Client s 3 Right click in the Policy column and select Clear Policy 328 NetSupport School 11 41 Student Security Settings The Tech Console allows you to view the current security status for Clients modify the security settings such as the Firewall Windows updates etc for Clients and configure the settings that determine whether a PC is secure If a Clie
97. a Student has outstanding help requests A flashing Question Mark icon appears in the top right of the relevant thumbnail To enable disable choose Monitor Show Help Requests from the Control window drop down menu 123 NetSupport School 11 41 Messenger Monitoring NetSupport School extends its application control features with the availability of Messenger Monitoring In addition to the ability to prevent Messenger applications running within the classroom NetSupport School also provides real time monitoring of specific Messenger applications presenting the Teacher with a real time view of chat activity and content Notes e Due to security limitations within certain instant messenger applications Messenger Monitoring only supports the following applications Yahoo Messenger 8 or above Google Talk and AIM can be blocked but not monitored e Messenger restrictions can be applied at startup Choose School Configuration Start Options Restrictions from the Control window drop down menu 1 Choose View Mode IM View from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Instant Messenger icon on the left hand side of the Control window Oeheohse gt ip RI Action Date Time Fa From To Information Rp sonedin astas anr an j Puse 09 53 43 04 07 2012 jeorp retsupp Hi what are your writing f age 08 54 09 04 07 2012 Jearp netsupp Mmm have not got to t age 09 54 19 04 07
98. ab To Prompt Students to Login 1 If specific Student details are required select the relevant Client icons in the Control window Alternatively to prompt all connected Students leave the icons unselected 2 Choose School Student Register from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Student Register icon on the toolbar 3 Select Sign In from the available options 4 The Student Register dialog will appear The Tutor can then select the information that the Student will be required to complete Note The Student Register will also appear if you check Create a Student Register on the Class Wizard 52 NetSupport School 11 41 Student Register Dialog This dialog enables the Tutor to create a customised Registration form which will prompt Students for their details By selecting a name the Tutor can also interact with Students using the View and Chat options Register Student s All Students Sc Client Name Name Sumame CB EA9734C7 Close A invu2es 9 invises amp xp sp3 t Het Successful Unsuccessful Class Details Required Student Details Teacher Name Mrs Wright Get Logged on User Name J First Name V Sumame Lesson Title History Class Student ID No Room Custom Fields Eval Objectives Auto save Register Class Details If required the teacher name lesson title room number and lesson objectives can be included on the Registration form that is sen
99. ach type of deployment the date and time the deployment took place and the workstations that were deployed to 3 As you select an item from the left hand pane itemised information about that deployment will appear in the right hand pane Printing a Log File 1 Select the required Log File in the Tree view 2 Choose Log Print from the Deploy Main window drop down menu Deleting a Log File 1 Select the required Log File in the Tree view 2 Choose Log Delete from the Deploy Main window drop down menu 40 NetSupport School 11 41 NetSupport School Deploy Room Mode NetSupport School provides a quick and easy way to assign PCs to a particular room and quickly deploy the Student software to those machines The Tutor specifies the required room at start of a lesson and will connect to all computers in that room Note If you need to deploy the Student software across your network or need more advanced deploy options you will need to use the NetSupport School Deploy utility This can be accessed by clicking Network on the NetSupport School Startup Wizard or selecting Start Programs NetSupport School NetSupport School Deploy 1 From the NetSupport School Startup Wizard select Classroom 2 The NetSupport School Deploy dialog will appear NetSupport School Deploy rete Choose which computers you want to deploy the NetSupport School student software to from the Available Computers list and add them to
100. achine and a Security Key This same information must also be entered at both the Tutor and Student machine thus validating connections between the various components Once the Tutor and Student connectivity options are set to use the designated Name Server each time the Student machine starts up its current IP Address will be registered with the Server In turn the Tutor will check the currently defined method for browsing for Students at Start Up but rather than performing a UDP browse of the network it will poll the Name Server to find Students matching the criteria Note If connecting to Students via the Name amp Connectivity Server in either Room or Publish Class mode it is necessary to set the Name amp Connectivity Server settings at the Tutor in both the Tutor Configurator and the Client Configurator 93 NetSupport School 11 41 Gateway Configuration General Properties You use this dialog to configure the properties of the Gateway Name Server You can access the dialog at the end of the installation when the dialog will appear automatically or via the NetSupport Gateway icon which appears in the workstations system tray Right click the icon and select Configure Gateway The dialog can also be accessed from the Gateway Console select File Configure Gateway from the drop down menu Alternatively you can run the file Pcigwcfg exe from the NetSupport School program folder Note To display the Gateway i
101. al Cancel Help Student icon Quiet Mode If this box is checked there will be no indication at the Client workstation that the Client program is loaded This is useful for preventing Students from manually unloading or otherwise misusing the Client program Request Help Disable Request help Prevents the Client User from being able to use the request Help Function Hotkeys These are the keys that the User at the Client will need to press to obtain access to the Request help Function The default is ALT LeftSHIFT RightSHIFT Note that some keyboards do not recognise a three key combination so if you experience problems try changing to a two key combination 272 NetSupport School 11 41 Menu Items Disable Join Class Prevents the Client from being able to use the Join Class Function Disable Chat Prevents the Client from being able to use the Chat Function Disable Replay Prevents the Client from being able to open Replay Files Disable Journal Disables the Journal options in the NetSupport School Client icon on the taskbar Students will still be able to access the Journal from the Student toolbar 273 NetSupport School 11 41 Advanced Settings This property sheet enables further personalisation of the Client s configuration A meaningful Client name can be used rather than the machine name or you can specify a particular image to load when the Client s keyboard and mouse are locked rather than use
102. and choose Manage Plans Or If displayed click the Create a Lesson Plan icon on the Lesson Plan bar The Lesson Plan window will appear Description 1G Lesson Plan untitled bola Ss File Edit gt l ae gt S y 4 New Open Save Add Edit Delete Move Plan Plan Plan Item Item kem Up This Lesson Plan Total Lesson Time hh mm 00 30 Available Items 1 Select Group x OPP select ears Change group selection To Select All Students E B show g 2 p Show x 7 nA Show tutor desktop to Students 1000 o I Q rere 3 Q Free Time x Free Lesson time 10 00 Test 4 Audio Mode x Control sound at the Students z Mute sound at the Students A Current View 5 GEE Scan x ee Scan through the currently connected Clients 1000 kd ilig 6 Message r x X Author Cancel From the Available Items list drag the required task and drop it into the window Enter any addition properties that are required When all tasks are in place save the lesson To create a new lesson click New on the toolbar or to re load a saved lesson click Open NetSupport School 11 41 6 Click OK 7 The Start Lesson window will appear This confirms the lesson content total time author and description of the lesson 8 To start the currently loaded lesson click OK or click Cancel to close the window Managing a Lesson Plan When a lesson is activated a progress bar will appear at the Tutor The Tutor will be prom
103. are TT Technician fed Select this option to install the Technician console and admin tools Custom B Select this option to install a combination of the above lt Back next gt Cancel Student Installs the Student software This feature the Client should be installed on workstations devices that will be remote controlled 17 NetSupport School 11 41 Tutor Installs the Tutor software This feature the Control should be installed on workstations devices which will be used to remote control other PCs IT Technician Installs the Tech Console This feature should be installed on workstations that will be managing and maintaining computers Custom Allows you to pick and choose which features to install on the workstation Click Next If you have selected Custom the Custom Setup screen will be displayed Custom Setup i NetSupport School InstallShield Wizard neon Custom Setup Select the program features you want installed E V Student V Tutor Console 7 Add desktop shortcut for Tutor Console V Remote Deployment Utility 4 Tech Console includes Remote Deployment 7 Add desktop shortcut for Tech Console J Name and Connectivity Server Install to C Program Files NetSupport NetSupport School l Change Help lt Back Cancel Select the component s to install on the workstation Student Install this component the Client on workstations devices t
104. arranged in alphabetical order according to the current application Student icons will be arranged in alphabetical order according to the running applications on the Student workstation Student icons will be arranged in alphabetical order according to the current policy set in the Tech Console This option will only be displayed if there is a policy in force Selection of one of the above options is identified by a blue dot Auto Arrange Ascending Align to Image Centres 218 If a new Student has been added to the list or a new application is running on a Student machine this option will automatically arrange the icons into the previously selected order above A blue tick will identify selection of this option To deselect this option simply re click Auto Arrange and the tick will disappear If this option has been selected the Student icons will appear in ascending order according to the previously selected option above A blue tick will identify selection of this option To deselect this option simply re click Ascending and the tick will disappear This will arrange the Student icons in descending order This option will only be available if a background image has been set to tile This will align the Student icons to the centre of the image NetSupport School 11 41 Close current running applications on a Student workstation The Tutor has two options when closing down an application on a Student workstation
105. ass select the required class and click Edit The dialog relating to the method of connection will appear allowing you to modify the details To delete a class select the required class and click Remove Power On Turns on all computers when connecting by Room or PC names Startup Options Create a Journal Allows you to start or open an existing Student Journal Create a Student Register Before the lesson starts you can prompt the Students to login with their names These will be displayed at the Tutor instead of the machine names Don t show this dialog again By checking this box the Class Wizard will not appear at startup Note To re activate the Class Wizard to appear at startup set the Display Class Wizard option in the startup section of the configuration Click OK to start the lesson The Tutor will now browse and connect to Students using the selected connection mode If you have asked for Students to register their names the Register Student dialog will appear 64 NetSupport School 11 41 Connect to Students using Browse Mode Browse Mode allows you to browse the local network and connect to all available Students that match your search criteria 1 2 In the Class Wizard select New Click Browse Mode 3 The NetSupport School Browse dialog will appear DN NetSupport School 7 Enter the name of the new browse prefix gt A E q Class1 V Make this the active connection method 0K aa
106. at progress to new members by checking the Send discussion history box Note Clients that have been removed or have decided to leave the Chat session can be invited back Eject To remove Clients from the Chat session select the Client in the Members list and click Eject Ejected Clients can be invited back into the session if required Notes e Students can also initiate Chat sessions by opening the Client Main window and choosing Commands Chat e By default the Student can only Chat to the Control However the Control can enable the option for Students to Chat to each other by selecting View Current Settings User Interface Student from the Control window drop down menu and checking Student to Student Chat Chat to a Client whilst Viewing 1 Choose Tools Chat from the View window drop down menu Or Click the Chat icon on the toolbar 2 The Chat Window will appear on the Control and Client workstation To end Chat 1 Choose Close from the Chat window 175 NetSupport School 11 41 Sending a Message to Students With NetSupport School you can send a message to all connected Students or the currently selected Students If you send the same message on a regular basis you can store up to four pre defined messages To enter and send a new message 1 2 Select the Students you want to send the message to Right click and choose Message Message Or Choose Student Message Messag
107. ation at the Control If Auto is enabled using Ctrl C copies the data directly to the clipboard Or If you have used Edit Cut Copy return to the Clients view window and click the Clipboard icon on the View window toolbar and choose Send Clipboard 3 To paste the data at the Client application choose Edit from the Client application drop down menu select Paste Or Use the short cut keys Ctrl V to paste the data NetSupport School 11 41 Sending the content of the clipboard from a Client to a Control workstation 1 2 3 View the required Client Open appropriate applications on the Client and Control workstations Copy the required data from the application at the Client as above but if using menu options rather than the shortcut keys choose Clipboard Retrieve Clipboard from the toolbar Return to the Control application and paste the data using the appropriate menu options or the short cut keys Ctrl V NetSupport School 11 41 Scanning Students The turn Scan function enables you to cycle through each connected Client in displaying its screen on the Control It is an alternative to Viewing multiple Clients in scaled windows which may cause their screens to be unreadable Mult iple Client screens can also be scanned in one Scan window To Scan one Client screen at a time 1 Choose Group Scan from the Control window drop down menu 2 The Scan dialog will appear S NetSupport Sch
108. ave selected for the deployment If a first time deployment the text will appear in red to indicate that required information has not been entered To enter or amend the information for the deployment Click Properties 3 The Install Properties dialog will appear 30 4 NetSupport School 11 41 NetSupport School Install Properties SA General Options Acknowledgement Message Restart Description Click Browse to specify the NetSupport School installation source folder C Program Files NetSupport NetSupport School D Browse NetSupport School Version 11 00 0000 Install Parameters File NSS ini Edit OK Cancel Help Enter the properties for the deployment by selecting the five tabs in turn General tab Used to specify the NetSupport School package to deploy and which components are to be installed Enter a description for the package being deployed If left blank the package name version number will be used Click Browse and select the folder containing the NetSupport School package to install Ideally this will be a folder containing a distribution copy of NetSupport School See the Creating an administrative network installation section of this manual Click Edit to specify the components to install The Install Configuration Options dialog will appear See the Install Configuration Options dialog section of this manual for a full description of this dialog
109. board Monitoring for further information Folder Testing Console Report Folder Specify a location for storing test results If left blank the reports will default to netsupport school tests reports Testing Console Exam Folder Specify a location for storing Exams Class List Folder Specify a location for storing Class Lists Journal Folder Specify the location for storing Student Journals 295 NetSupport School 11 41 Audio Recordings Folder Specify the location for storing Audio recordings Advanced Pre defined Client and Group Lists can also be included in a Tutor Profile but these aren t enabled by default Before deciding to apply these to a Profile consider the current method of browsing for Students on startup as you may not want to override this Client File Contains a list of Known Client machines that the Tutor program attempts to connect to when loading Default file name CLIENT NSS See Class lists for more information Group File Contains the details of any Client Groups that have been created Default file name GROUP NSS See Working with Groups for more information Use shared data files Checking this option allows you to share data with other users 296 NetSupport School 11 41 CONFIGURING REMOTE CONTROL SETTINGS NetSupport School provides a range of customisable options enabling you to tailor each Remote Control session to suit specific requirements and conditions The Tutor has the op
110. bottom of the Control window to select the required size 153 NetSupport School 11 41 Auto Fit Size of Student Thumbnail This option will automatically adjust the size of the displayed thumbnails to fit the window 1 Click the Auto icon at the bottom of the Control window Notes e You can send an audio announcement to Students headphones or speakers Click the Announce icon at the bottom of the Control window The Announce dialog will appear e Recordings can be played back to Students using the Show function 154 NetSupport School 11 41 Using Audio Support NetSupport School allows you to use audible communications to connected Clients via microphones headphones and speakers during View and Show NetSupport School will only operate Audio if the workstations have Audio Support Installed Note NetSupport School also allows you to monitor all Student audio activity see Audio Monitoring for further information The Announce Function This feature sends the audio announcement to all the selected students headphones or speakers They will be able to hear the Tutor but will not be able to speak back To make an announcement 1 Choose Student Announce from the Control window drop down menu bar Or Click the Announce icon on the toolbar Or Click the Communicate icon drop down arrow on the Control toolbar and select Announce Or In Audio view click the Announce icon at the bottom of the Control w
111. cast Show facility can be enabled see Control Configurator Connectivity This results in the screen information being sent to all machines simultaneously thus improving the speed of transfer Whilst reducing overall network traffic generated by NetSupport School using this feature will generate additional broadcast packets on your network It is recommended that you consult your network administrator before using this feature The Show can be sent to Students using multicast The broadcast will only be sent to machines included in the specified IP multicast address To include a snapshot of the screen in the Student Journal click Print Screen during the Show or right click the Show icon on the taskbar A dialog will appear displaying the image to be added to the Journal notes can be added to accompany the image To Show a Control screen 1 Click the Show Menu icon on the Control toolbar and choose Show 2 Your desktop will be displayed to all connected Students Note You can set the properties for a Show session select View Current Settings Show from the Control window drop down menu Or 136 NetSupport School 11 41 1 Choose Student Show Show from the Control window drop down menu Or Right click a selected Client icon and choose Show 2 The Show dialog will appear a gt NetSupport School Show mm whole Desktop Z Cancel Client James Smith These Clients Name
112. cations on Student PCs View set Power Management Windows Update and Security Settings Edit the registry of a remote system Launch a local command prompt from the remote system on your PC Automatically connect to Students Teachers using Room mode Ability to search for Students by name device or class Apply a school wide set of internet application USB CD DVD and print restrictions NetSupport School allows Teachers to request help from Lab Technicians and network managers ensure the Teacher Support feature is enabled choose View Provide Teacher Support from the Control window drop down menu A Get Support icon will be displayed on the Tutor console tool bar Clicking the icon allows the Tutor to either chat or send a message directly to the lab technician or network manager 324 NetSupport School 11 41 Hardware and Software Inventory For many support teams an important part of the problem resolution process is knowing not only what platform the workstation is running but also its hardware specifications and the applications installed on the workstation For this reason NetSupport School provides the tools to supply a full inventory of the remote workstation In addition to its sophisticated hardware software reporting where over 50 items of information are collected specifically about the hardware or environment of the client PC you can obtain details of applications in memory installed hot fixes proc
113. cent Annotation Redo Redo an Annotation that has been undone Tool Choose from a range of tools with which to annotate the screen For example freehand draw draw arrow select region f meet Colour Sets the pen colour Width Sets the width of the line Fill Sets the colour and fill style Font Sets text font Suspend Suspends the Show allowing you to go back to the Control View window Not available when Viewing or Exhibiting End Ends the Show and takes you back to Control View window 150 Not available when Viewing or Exhibiting NetSupport School 11 41 Audio Monitoring Audio Monitoring allows the Tutor to monitor audio activity on all Students workstations The Tutor is instantly alerted to any microphone or speaker headphone activity at the Student and can select one of the displayed Student thumbnails to listen to the audio being played on that PC Audio activity can also be recorded and played back to Students Notes e Ifthe Student toolbar is enabled Students will be advised when their audio activity is being listened to or recorded e Windows XP 2003 64bit systems do not support audio output from software applications to be captured 1 Choose View Mode Audio View from the Control window drop down menu Or Select the Audio icon on the left hand side of the Control window POEN i 3 h 3 b a Pi 1 a A nae Sar E me OaE oE a dor MEn a ce barony CAE M ian Ci NET
114. cess ee ee este ee eeeeeaeaeas 62 Class Wizard wics sees acta neauats tau aap arr av bees od es caval shia E aa 63 Connect to Students using Browse MOde ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 65 Connect to Students using PC MOdC ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeees 66 Connect to Students using User Mode eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeees 67 Connect to Students via ROOM Mode eceeeceeeeeeeeeee eee ee eee ee eens 68 Creating a class for Students to join Publish Class neccsser 70 NetSupport School 11 41 Class WIStS ii a bald puta Guna daven tel cobeaulieadel een mand tay 72 Connecting to NetSupport Assist Students ceseeeeeeeeeee eee ees 73 Client Disconnects from an Active SeSSION ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 74 Configuring NetSupport School For Subnet Browsing seses 75 Understanding IP AdCreSSe S cceceeeeee eect ee eee ee eee eeeeaea ea ea eaten 77 Implementing NetSupport School in a Terminal Server Environment 79 Installing and Configuring the NetSupport School Tutor Assistant 80 Installing and Configuring NetSupport School on Google Chrome 83 Licensing for Google CHrome ccceeeee cece eens tees ee ee ease ease eaeaeeeeanaed 86 Installing and configuring the NetSupport School Student for Android 87 Installing and configuring the NetSupport School Student for iOS 88 Licensing fOr Tablets cccieviescceaieecatecsiedtecsed a Ea aaa 89 Using NetSupport School in a wi
115. choose Properties The Client Properties dialog will appear select the Security tab Click Change and alter the settings as required NetSupport School 11 41 Remote Command Prompt Window By launching the Command Prompt window you can remotely execute command line instructions at a connected Client 1 Connect to the required Client and choose Tools Remote Command Prompt from the drop down menu Or Right click on the Client icon and select Remote Command Prompt Or Click the Remote Command icon on the toolbar 2 The Remote Command Prompt window will appear The title bar will confirm the name of the connected Client 9 testing Remote Command Prompt co 2a 25 Bo Stop The window is split into two frames The input frame at the bottom of the window which can be resized if required and the output results frame at the top While the window is open each command is stored by the Control enabling you to recall previous instructions that you may wish to run again Either scroll through the entries using the up and down arrow keys and press enter when the required command is displayed or press F7 to show all commands in a window Click on the required command and press enter A maximum of 50 commands are stored To clear the history press F8 Once the Control closes the Remote Command window the history is cleared automatically 331 NetSupport School 11 41 TESTING MODULE NetSupport School
116. ck Refresh at any time to update the display 132 NetSupport School 11 41 Save To keep a permanent record of the displayed items you can save the details to a text file before disconnecting Export Exports data to a CSV file allowing the data to be imported if needed Print Prints details of the currently displayed items Close Closes the History dialog but details will continue to be recorded while the Control is connected 133 NetSupport School 11 41 Screen Capture Screen Capture enables the Tutor to take a snapshot of the current Student screen whilst Viewing or Scanning and allows the Tutor to save the current screen contents to a file The machine name Student name date time and product name will also be recorded on the Screen Capture when saved INVE ir g MARKETINGO uk peife is a PE Tenela ICT Level 2 Eval Mrs Wright BD S m r ssy Tose e ownloads AENOR AWARDS 2012 WINNER ew roouer or me YEAR Student INVHBS Dale Wed J04 102200202 NetSuppot Schoo Capture a Students screen whilst Viewing 1 When Viewing a Student choose Tools Capture Screen to capture the current screen contents Or Click the Capture icon on the toolbar A Save As dialog will appear Type in a File name Choose one of the three different file formats BMP JPG and PNG Click Save m 1S 134 NetSupport School 11 41 Capture a Students screen whilst Scanning 1
117. ck Yes To delete a Folder Select the folder you wish to delete Click the toolbar Delete Folder button The Remove folder dialog will be displayed Select the Include Contents check box Click Yes OBRWNFE Notes e You cannot remove more than one folder at a time If you have several folders selected in the List View when performing the Delete operation only the last selected folder will be removed e By default all files deleted from the Local pane will be sent to the Recycle bin this can be changed in the File Transfer settings 183 NetSupport School 11 41 Distributing Files As well as enabling you to transfer files to and from individual Clients NetSupport School also allows you to distribute files to multiple Clients simultaneously You can distribute files to e All connected Clients e Selected Clients e A pre defined group of Clients Note When distributing files to Clients the files are sent to each Client machine in turn In some network environments where there is limited network bandwidth available or when broadcasting to larger numbers of machines this can affect performance In these circumstances NetSupport School s Broadcast File Distribution facility can be enabled This results in the files being sent to all machines simultaneously thus improving the speed of transfer Whilst reducing overall network traffic generated by NetSupport School using this feature will generate additiona
118. ck the required item to send the message to Students Or To create a new message select Preset Messages 178 NetSupport School 11 41 Help Requests NetSupport School allows a Client to Request Help from a Control They do this either by selecting the request Help Command from the Client menu assuming that it has not been configured for quiet mode which hides the Client icon or by pressing the hotkeys set in the Client Configurator Note If the Student Toolbar is enabled Students can request help by clicking on the Help request icon To request help 1 Press the Hotkeys usually ALT LSHIFT RSHIFT Or Click the Help Request icon in the Student toolbar 2 This opens a dialog box into which they type the message Request Help es Your name Eddie OK Message Ca dont understand section 3 Could you help me Cancel Previous Request Help a 3 Click OK 4 The Help Request will then be sent to the connected Control Note Students can send an alert to the Tutor when work is complete they need help or they need urgent help They do this by clicking the Help Request icon in the Student toolbar selecting an option from the Alert Teacher drop down list and clicking Alert The Student toolbar will change colour depending on the alert selected The Student icon at the Tutor will change colour to notify the Tutor what alert has been raised green for work is complete amber for
119. cknowledge option in the Client Configurator You will have to confirm the connection before it can take place 44 NetSupport School 11 41 The Control Window The Control window is the primary interface for e Configuring the Control e Connecting to Student workstations e Maintaining Client information e Selecting which Student workstations to work with e Selecting tasks to carry out NETSUPPORT S SCHOOL Objectives Register web research prose witing Ready ap 31 Students Al a1 o The Title Bar ES NetSupport S KETING01 anar ame This indicates that you are in the Control window and displays the n of the NetSupport School Control workstation The Menu Bar School Student Group View Layout Planner Journal Window Help The Menu bar contains a series of drop down menus that can be used to access the various tools and configuration utilities These menus can be used to select Student workstations to work with as well as maintaining and organising Student workstations into work groups 45 NetSupport School 11 41 The toolbar contains shortcuts to many of the most frequently used tasks and tools Positioning the cursor over an icon will display a brief description of its function For convenience features that are of a similar nature Show Show Video Show Replay Files for example are grouped within the same toolbar icon However you can add these as indivi
120. click OK to return to the Deploy Summary dialog You can review your selections and edit if required Click Deploy to commence the installation A progress dialog will appear enabling you to monitor the deployment as it installs on each workstation Deploy NetSupport School Log Status Close Checking TEST30 Client version NSS Y11 00i17 detected Retrieving platform information for TEST30 Print TEST30 running Windows 2000 Copying NetSupport School to TEST30 Done Installation started on TEST30 NetSupport School sent to 1 machines Operation complete Installation pending on 1 machines 33 34 NetSupport School 11 41 The dialog has two tabs Log tab enables you to monitor the deployment as it reaches each workstation Status tab lists the stage the deployment has reached on each workstation For example the installation may be complete on one machine but still in progress on another Click Close to return to the Deploy main window when the installation is complete NetSupport School 11 41 Deploy a Client Configuration Using NetSupport School Deploy you can remotely deploy a Client Configuration file containing specific Client settings 1 2 Ee 8 9 Select the required workstations Choose Deploy Client Configuration from the Deploy Main window drop down menu Or Right click the selected workstations and choose Deploy Client Configuration The Deploy Sum
121. con in the system tray choose Start Programs Startup NetSupport School Name Server Console On Windows 8 machines right click in the Start screen and choose All Apps at the bottom of the screen Click the NetSupport School Name Server Console icon fe NetSupport Gateway Configuration Utility Ea Listening Port and Interfaces Listen on all IP interfaces Port s 443 e g 443 3085 etc Listen on specified IP interfaces IP Address Port Comms Management Packet Interval CMPI secs 60 Event Log Files Location C Program Files NetSupport Net Support Scho Max file size KB 1000 Browse 94 NetSupport School 11 41 Listening Port and Interfaces Listen on all IP interfaces By default the installed Gateway component uses the local IP Address es and communicates through Port 443 Listen on specified IP interfaces If the Gateway machine has multiple network cards installed you can add the specific IP Address to use Click Add and enter the required address Note The IP address of the Gateway machine and key will also need to be configured at both the Tutor and Student workstation Comms Management Packet Interval CMPI secs When configured for Gateway connections the Client workstation confirms its availability by periodically polling the Gateway By default a network packet is sent every 60 seconds but you can change this if required Event Log Files Gateway activity d
122. configuration the default NetSupport School or a user defined profile Click OK The name will be added to the profile list 5 To change the content of the profile click Edit The File Locations dialog will appear 6 In each category select the file to be used in the profile The Folder locations dialog allows you to change where items are located 7 Click OK Each time the Tutor program is started the user will be presented with a list of locally stored Profiles to choose from Should you wish to share Profiles across a network the R command line instruction can be used to launch the Tutor program with a centrally available Profile 253 NetSupport School 11 41 For example from the NetSupport School program folder run the command pcinssui rN SampleProfile cfg If the profile in this example SampleProfile cfg does not currently exist a default will be loaded enabling you to add your own values Once you exit the Tutor program the Profile will be stored in the specified location NetSupport School 11 41 Manage Student Resources Students can now easily access any resources required during a lesson The Tutor can create a resource list and add links to websites applications and documents this list is then displayed in the Student toolbar providing Students with a quick and easy way to access the required resources B Resources List untitled ECS File Edit a l 22 22 32 e New Open Save Add Edit Delet
123. cross a wireless network 286 NetSupport School 11 41 Note NetSupport School will automatically detect any wireless Students and enable this option to improve performance When this option is activated the Tutor Performance settings will automatically be turned on You can disable these settings by unchecking the Use Performance setting if wireless detected option in Tutor Performance settings Maximum throughput Controls the level of data sent across the network to your wireless access point The default data rate is 8 Mbps If required this can be altered to reflect the speed of the router Deploy Opens the NetSupport School Basic Deploy dialog allowing you to deploy Student software to PCs in a particular room 287 NetSupport School 11 41 Performance Settings Allows you to set low bandwidth and colour reduction settings to lower data sent across the network Settings for Configuration NetSupport School x Bm ch ti 4 19 Start Options Performance Settings 3 Start Options Low bandwidth mode 3 Restrictions f This mode is designed for network environments where low data usage is a priority Network and Wireless Settings When enabled video performance and quality will be reduced and limit network activity X Performance Student Selection NetSupport Protect Agee 4 Administration r i When enabled the colour palette will be reduced from full colour to 256 colours 83 Security amp Profile
124. ct Students for exam 361 send physical fonts 273 send collect work 186 change properties 190 collect work 188 send work 186 sending messages 175 create pre set messages 176 server installation 23 set class time 259 set name for Control 287 setup see installing show leaders 140 376 show printers 242 show settings 318 showing a Client screen 142 across a wireless network 283 an application 170 annotate while showing 147 broadcast show 135 283 hotkey combinations 135 replay files 168 set show leader 139 suspend a show 139 the Control screen 135 using audio 155 using Show leaders 140 videos 158 sign in 52 sign out 54 silent disconnect 74 308 silent installation 24 specify parameters 25 silent mode 273 software inventory 323 starting NetSupport test designer 331 starting NetSupport School 43 startup restrictions 281 startup settings 280 student disconnects 74 student journal 255 adding notes to the journal 255 student login 51 Student name configure 273 student register 52 student rewards 264 student security settings 327 student surveys 226 show results to students 226 survey lists 229 student toolbar 261 student toolbar settings 315 student user interaface settings 310 subnet browsing 75 suspend group leader 102 switch desktop protection off 289 NetSupport School 11 41 system pre requisites 14 tech console 320 policy management 325 remote command p
125. curity of locking the Students so they can only view the pages opened by the Tutor Note The Co Browser is not supported with websites that use Flash Navigation or Java Scripting To open a Co Browse Session 1 Select the Client s that are to be included in the session 2 Choose Student Co Browse from the Co Browse window drop down menu Or If displayed click the Co Browse icon on the toolbar 3 The Co Browse window will open and also appear on the selected Student machines From here you can open web pages and create new tabs that allow you to navigate between web pages P BBC GCSE Bitesize What is an ICT System Co browser File View Bookmarks e Back Restrictions Window Help xD Bs a Stop Refresh Home Print Pause Synchronise Address http www bbe co uk schools gesebitesize ict system Dictsystemsrev1 shtml German Irish Maths Music Physical Education Religious Studies Science Spanish Welsh 2nd Language f Audio Games Message Boards Find us on Facebook KS3 Bitesize More Bitesize BBC Teachers input output processing and feedback and the integration of ICT devices a guy 72 ICT information systems What is an ICT System An ICT system is a set up consisting of hardware software data and _ the people who use them It commonly includes communications technology such as the Internet ICT and computers are not the same thing Computers are t
126. d or when you exit out of the NetSupport School program The default Application List is saved as NetSupport School app 224 NetSupport School 11 41 View Application History This feature of the Application Control Module enables you to monitor the Applications being used by connected Students and if required store or print a permanent record In Applications View choose Applications History from the Control window drop down menu The Application History dialog will appear This provides details of any application used by the Student s during the currently connected session j Application Histon Show History for Student Name Login Name Computer Name Application Started 8 Lisa testing INVH142 Adobelm_Cleanup 0001 Entry Point Not Found 01 19 12 10 09 49 peijle INVH288 My Computer INVH288 01 19 12 10 09 12 testing INVH142 Adobelm_Cleanup 0001 Entry Point Not Found 01 19 12 10 09 12 poijle INVH288 Document Microsoft Word 01 19 12 10 09 09 paile INVH288 Calculator 01 19 12 10 08 59 testing INVH142 Adobe Photoshop 01 19 12 10 08 14 testing XP SP3 Screen Saver 01 19 12 10 03 59 paile INVH288 Screen Saver 01 19 12 09 58 56 poijle INVH368 Screen Saver 01 19 12 09 51 18 peijle INVH288 NetSupport Intranet Windows Intemet Explorer 01 19 12 09 48 10 poijle INVH368 BBC Leaming online leaming resources Google Chrome 01 19 12 09 40 24 poijle INVH368 Google Google Chrome 01 19 12 09 40 16 testing XP SP3 Google
127. d clear the Display image when locking mouse and keyboard check box The Blank screen when locking mouse and keyboard check box will automatically be selected Enable DVD Playback and Direct 3D support Win XP and above only On Windows XP and above NetSupport School uses the Microsoft Mirror Driver to capture screen data for view sessions However while hooked into the Mirror Driver it is not possible to play DVD s Therefore if you do need the capability to play DVD s NetSupport School provides options which load and unload the Mirror Driver as required Except While Viewed If checked DVD support is enabled but will be disabled for the duration of a view session while the Mirror Driver is loaded Except While Connected If checked DVD support is suspended while a connection to the Client is in place 276 NetSupport School 11 41 Student Journal Settings A Student Journal is provided allowing key information from the lesson to be stored in a portable PDF file You can use these options to customise the settings for the Student Journal NetSupport School Client Configurator b Network Settings Margins mm Page tie bs ks E E ete ea Bottom 15 Audio Font size points User Interface Left 15 1 W Advanced Right 15 Journal t Terminal Services JPEG Quality 1 100 75 Joumal Folder Joumals Note If specifying a network path the Student must have access to this folder in order for the Tutor
128. d it is anticipated that a number of installs will be performed either at once or over a period of time This type of installation can also be preconfigured to setup NetSupport School with certain options therefore ensuring that all NetSupport School installations are configured the same Once created the distribution copy can be used when performing a standard install a Silent Installation or as part of a remote deployment To setup a distribution copy of NetSupport School on a server 1 Create a folder on the network that is accessible to all PCs that you may want to install on 2 Copy from your original source media CD or download the file SETUP EXE 3 Create and copy a valid NSM LIC file to this folder If a licence file is not present in the folder when running the install NetSupport School will be installed using the default Evaluation licence 4 Create and copy a CLIENT32 INI file to this folder Note You can make the network folder read only to avoid the configuration being altered by unauthorised users To install NetSupport School from a server onto individual workstations 1 At the required workstation navigate to the network folder containing the NetSupport School setup files 2 Run Setup exe 3 Follow instructions in Starting the Installation 23 NetSupport School 11 41 Silent Installation A silent installation is one that requires no input from the user providing a convenient meth
129. d will appear on the selected Student screens The Tutor can continue to annotate the Whiteboard in real time 5 To remove the Whiteboard from Student screens select Whiteboard Show Whiteboard from the drop down menu Or Select the Show icon at the bottom of the Control window Whiteboard Leader When Students are viewing the Whiteboard they cannot initially annotate the screen themselves However the Tutor can nominate a Student to be the Whiteboard Leader This activates the annotation options at the selected machine The Tutor can switch control to any of the other participants as required by selecting their icon in the Student List 1 Select the required Student from the Student List 146 NetSupport School 11 41 2 Choose Whiteboard Make Student Leader from the Control window drop down menu Or Right click the required icon in the Students List and select Make Leader 3 The Student can now use the available tools to add content to the Whiteboard 2 Whiteboard MARKETINGO1 uk peijle toka z HTP A Tm al 4 Control can be switched to another Student by simply selecting their icon in the Student List and repeating step 2 Note The Whiteboard leader can send the current Whiteboard image to their Journal by selecting Options Send to Journal from the Whiteboard toolbar 147 NetSupport School 11 41 Annotating Screens The can Show Exhibit and View features provide a u
130. dedicated Chrome OS learning environments The NetSupport School Tutor for Chrome can be installed on the teacher s Chrome OS system enabling you to interact with student Chromebooks 11 NetSupport School 11 41 Conventions Used The following logical and easy to understand conventions are used in this manual e Step by step instructions which should be performed in sequence are shown as numbered paragraphs beneath a clearly stated How to do heading e As there is often more than one way of carrying out a task you will find Or options also included e Additional tips or explanatory notes regarding these instructions are enclosed in a border under the heading Note e Individual items in menu commands are enclosed in braces and should be followed in sequence for example Student Broadcast Terminology Used Control Tutor The workstation that is used to take over another Client Student The workstation that is to be taken over Available Client When a Client has been installed on a workstation it becomes available for connection to a Control A Client must be available before a Control can connect to it Known Client Having browsed for available Clients NetSupport stores a list of Clients in the Client NSS file These are Known Clients Connected Client All available Client s or groups of Clients can be chosen for simultaneous connection A Control can only remote control a Client to which they a
131. dent providing feedback on the current lesson 50 NetSupport School 11 41 Student Automatic Login If a generic naming convention is used for your classroom PCs you can automatically log the Students in to save time at the start of a lesson To automatically login Student machines 1 2 Select the Student machine s you wish to login Choose Student Power Management Login from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Manage icon on the Control toolbar and choose Login The Auto Login dialog will appear Login Login Details Username Password Domain Q Status Name User Name View wa Andy peijle v3 James peijle va Jane peijle 278 Sarah testing Enter the user name password and domain and click Login The user name will appear once the login has been successful You can also view Student screens from this dialog select the required Student and click View Click Close when complete 51 NetSupport School 11 41 Student Register By default NetSupport School will display the computer name of the Client workstation in the Control window However there may be times when you want the control to display the actual name of the student and request additional information The Student Register option enables the Tutor to prompt the Students for their details Note You can also change the name of the Client workstation by editing the Client Properties Details t
132. dent and when the thinking time or time limit is at 5 and 2 5 seconds Sounds effects will be turned on by default 239 NetSupport School 11 41 1 Click the Sound effects icon at the bottom of the Control window 2 Select the relevant option to turn sound effects on off at the Tutor or Student 3 Use the slider bar to adjust the volume This can be locked at the Student if required Bouncing Questions To encourage discussion across the class you can bounce a question to the next Student asking if they have an answer or what they thought of the previous answer Note You can only bounce a question for First to Answer and Pot Luck question types when more than one Student has been selected Questions can be automatically bounced to the next Student who has responded as soon as you click the tick or cross Select the Automatically bounce to next Student option in the Ask the question dialog The question will be bounced around the Students for the number of times specified Manually Bounce Questions If you haven t selected the automatically bounce option you can still bounce questions to the next available Student 1 Select Q amp A Bounce Question from the Control window drop down menu Or Right click the Student and select Bounce Question Or Click the Bounce icon at the bottom of the Control window When a question has been bounced the display changes to show who now has the question and where it came from The nex
133. dual icons if preferred Some drop down menus will have a small pin in the right hand corner Clicking this pin turns the menu into a floating window which is displayed until you close the window To customise the toolbar choose View Toolbar Customise or right click the toolbar and choose Customise The Quick View Bar Quick View Sjinv3e8 E xp spa The Quick view bar is used to switch between currently connected Clients Clicking on the button containing the required Client s name enables you to immediately View that Client s window To enable disable the Quick view bar choose View Toolbar Quick View The Lesson Bar el stewttordeskiop to Studeres Ee O reran tine E anaes ii i u 4 The Lesson bar allows you to create a lesson and provides tools to manage the lesson once in progress A Progress bar will advise the Tutor on the current activity and time remaining To enable disable the Lesson bar choose View Toolbar Lesson Plan 46 NetSupport School 11 41 The Group Bar Baia 2 Year 8 3 2 Year 10 2 Until you have defined groups of Clients only the ALL group will appear on this toolbar Once defined the group name along with the number of members will appear and the Group tool icons will become fully active allowing you to add delete and change group properties With the required Student group selected properties such as the displayed name and icon image ca
134. e Click OK The Subject will be added to the Tree view 2 Within the Subject create a Topic Select Create Topic and enter a name Click OK 3 Author s information can now be added If required edit the description and add any additional supporting text You can also assign a Level to each question to indicate the level of difficulty 350 NetSupport School 11 41 4 Click Finish to store the question and return to the Create a Question dialog Either select another question type or click Close to return to the Question Editor window Edit Questions To edit a stored question highlight it in the Tree and choose Questions Edit Question from the drop down menu click the Edit The Selected Item icon or right click the question and select Edit Change the required details by selecting the appropriate tab on the Edit Question dialog and click OK when complete Note Questions can be duplicated right click the question and select Duplicate The Edit Question dialog will appear if required make any changes and click OK when complete the duplicate question will now appear under the original question in the Tree Question amp Answers Page Question Resources Question Details Instructions identify the correct capital cities for the countries listed below Statement 1 Wiel is the capital of England ines is the capital of Italy CESAS is the capital of America Statement 4 Sis the capital o
135. e Restrict Websites You can add websites to the approved or restricted lists in the Web Control Module from the Co Browser window 1 Select the website you wish to approve or restrict Choose Restrictions Add to Approved Sites or Add to Restricted Sites from the Co Browser drop down menu 3 The website will now either be approved or restricted and this will apply to the Students when using the Co Browser Notes e There are three different modes that you can apply to Students while they are using the Co Browser Locked Restricted and Free by default the Students will be locked e You can pause the Students Co Browse session by selecting the Pause icon on the toolbar This may be useful if you wish to perform any functions you don t wish the Students to see e To set the Students web pages to the same as the Tutor s click the Synchronise icon on the toolbar 213 NetSupport School 11 41 Lock Unlock Students in the Co browser There are several different modes you can apply to the Students when using the Co Browser Lock Students lets you guide Students through a selection of web pages with Students having no control over what they are viewing Restrict Students enables Students to have some control but only view web pages that you have selected Free Students allows Students have full control over what websites they can access Note Whilst the Students are unlocked any restrictions applied in the Web Contr
136. e from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Communicate icon on the Control toolbar and select Message Or If displayed click the Message icon on the toolbar The Message dialog box will appear Choose whether to send the message to all Connected Clients or only the currently selected Clients Enter the message and decide whether to show the message at the Clients PCs for a specified time Note If the Student Journal has been started you will have the option to add the message to this 176 Click Send The Message will be displayed in a dialog at the Client screens and will remain until the User closes the dialog or the specified time limit expires Send Message le Send a message to All connected Clients Currently selected Clients Please hand your essay in at the end of the lesson Show this message for sec ty Send _ Cancel Help NetSupport School 11 41 To Send a Quick Message 1 Click the Communicate icon on the toolbar 2 Enter the message under Quick Message and click Send 3 The message will be sent to all connected Students Send a message whilst Viewing 1 Choose Client Message from the View window drop down menu Or Click the Send a Message icon on the toolbar 2 The Send Message dialog box will appear 3 Enter your message 4 Click Send The message will be displayed on the Student screen currently being viewed by the Tutor and will
137. e Client requesting help 271 sending 178 history application control module 224 web control module 209 hotkeys 271 display when showing 135 icons customise 103 image file display image when Client locked 275 import export data See testing module install configuration options 25 installation setup type 17 installing from a server 23 parameters for silent install 25 planning 13 pre requisites 14 remote deploy 26 silent installation 24 installing and configuring android student 86 iOS student 87 374 installing netsupport school on google chrome 83 installing the tutor assistant 80 instcfg exe file 25 interactive whiteboard 144 inventory 323 iOS 87 ip subnet browsing 75 join class 70 disable Client joining class 272 keyboard monitoring 127 setting up word lists 127 typing history 131 label image question 340 launching applications 191 launching applications at Clients 191 layout arrange Client icons 57 set background 58 lesson planner 259 set class time 259 list view application view See application control module arrange icons 57 survey view See student surveys web view See web control module lock unlock mouse and keyboard 105 display graphic 106 display image 275 lock unlock students in the co browser 213 log files during a remote deploy 40 logging in students 51 logout 197 manage student resources 254 messages create pre set messages 176 sending 175 me
138. e Move Up Available Items Resources List o 1 Website x www maths com E Application So z 1 25 wmplayer exe x Document W _ Program Files Windows Media Player wmplayer exe Cancel To Create a resource list 1 Select School Manage Student Resources from the Control window drop down menu 2 The Resources List window will appear 3 Select the required resource from the Available items list and either drag and drop to the Resource list or click the Add icon in the toolbar You will be prompted to enter a description and location for the resource 4 The order of the list can be sorted using the appropriate arrows 5 Click Save and specify a file name for the list once saved the resources will be displayed in the Student toolbar 255 NetSupport School 11 41 Student Journal NetSupport School provides a Student Journal this is an electronic record of key information that has been covered during the lesson The Student Journal is in the form of a portable PDF document allowing Students to refer back to it after the lesson Not only can the Tutor add notes and resources used during the lesson directly to every Student Journal the Students are able to add their own notes making this a truly personalised document The unique Student Journal offers a welcome summary for any Students who were absent from a lesson as well as a structured summary of activity for the Teacher Note PDF reader w
139. e Testing Console vice cies ndai nen aE E ev Ea 363 RUNNING AN EXAM siteres iana ee eee eee ener nent een need 363 Test REPOS WINDOW uc creece teas aaa aaea aaa aa iene 366 The Test Players cisiesscudse A niaaa a a aa aa dienaa hae 368 CONTACT US ccccccscece cece eee eases eee esse ee eaee nese ease ee ee eases 370 INDEX onc cecececece cece cece ce cece aeaeaeaeaeaeeeese ses eeeeeeeeeesesesesa see seeeaeeeaeenananae 371 NetSupport School 11 41 What is NetSupport School NetSupport School is the class leading training software solution providing teachers with the ability to instruct and visually audibly monitor as well as interact with their students individually as a pre defined group or to the whole class Rising to the challenge and requirements of today s modern classroom NetSupport School provides the ability to deliver lesson content simultaneously monitor all student PCs and work collaboratively ensuring that complete student attention and focus is maintained at all times There are no hidden extras all features are included as standard including a customised testing suite dedicated Technicians Console digital student revision aids lesson planning tools and the option for teachers to reward students for good effort NetSupport School can be used on any Windows computer and is designed to work flawlessly over both wired and wireless networks Increasingly schools are also embracing new PC technologies and NetSupp
140. e icon on the View window toolbar and select Share Watch or Control Or Select Client Share Watch Control from the View window drop down menu Other View window options are Scaling to Fit It may be that the Client is running in a higher resolution than the Control In this case choosing the Scale to Fit option from the View window menu or toolbar will re size its screen to fit the window in which it is displayed Keep Aspect Maintain the correct aspect ratio of the remote screen Switching to Full Screen Alternatively you might choose to use the whole of the Control s screen to display the Client s screen This is known as the Full Screen Viewing While Viewing a Client in Full Screen a floating toolbar will also be displayed If you close this down remember to use the hot keys usually CTRL RSHIFT LSHIFT to get back to the Control window or press lt PAUSE ALT gt to display the drop down menus Screen Scrape NetSupport School s favoured and the most efficient method for capturing screen data is to hook into the Video Driver of the workstation being viewed However there may be occasions when this method will not work because certain applications bypass the driver In these circumstances you can enable screen scrape mode in order to take a snapshot of the screen Although this will have a greater impact on the network it will at least provide an accurate representation of the Client s screen Maximise Vi
141. e one star appearing next to their grade someone scoring 80 four stars The image restricted to 32x32 pixels must be imported into the Resources database A default reportgrade is provided but you can create and import your own customised images if required Give each Grading Band a description and attach the appropriate mark Click Add to insert each Band into the list When all Bands have been added click Save Use the Edit or Delete buttons to change any of the items in the list You can view the grades each Student has achieved in the Test Reports Window 354 NetSupport School 11 41 Create Exam Having created a suitable mix of questions in the Question Editor adding those questions to an exam is a quick and easy process The Exam Wizard guides you through the process of selecting the required questions setting a time limit for the exam using your own grading system and including supporting information New questions can also be created during this process To Create an Exam 1 Choose Exams Create Exam from the Designers drop down menu or click the Create New Exam icon General Information Optional details Title History Agerange 1415 Description Year 10 end of term History test a Class Group 10CT Notes Timed Exam v Time Limt 01 00 1 Hours Minutes Grading Schema Net gt Canca Hep 2 The first stage is to enter general supporting information about the exa
142. ed class without having to define additional Browse address information on the Student PC The basic requirements for using a Name Server are e It needs to be installed on a PC that is accessible to all Tutor and Student PCs e It needs to have a static IP address e The Tutor and Student PCs need to be configured to use the Name Server The Name Server Tutor PC and Student PC must have a matching Name Server Security key configured 92 NetSupport School 11 41 Installing amp Configuring a Name Server A Name Server or Gateway is designed to run on a machine that is accessible from both the Tutor and Student PCs It must therefore have a fixed or static IP address The Name Server can be installed as a standalone component on the machine you wish to use or along with other NetSupport School components When performing a NetSupport School installation select the Name and Connectivity Server component from the Custom Setup screen You will also need to configure the Server Gateway properties At the end of the installation the Gateway Configuration dialog will appear or after installation you can launch the dialog by right clicking on the Gateway icon in the system tray or from the Gateway Console File menu Note To display the Gateway icon in the system tray choose Start Programs Startup NetSupport School Name Server Console The Gateway Name Server is configured with the IP Address of the Gateway m
143. ed class can then be loaded at the start of the lesson and you can quickly connect to Student machines New Class Lesson Details Teacher name Lesson title What time does this Lesson finish Objectives Outcome V Open lesson Connect to 2 0 gE New Eval ICT xp Startup Options Create a Student Register i Create a Joumal Pi to Dont show this dialog again Quit OK Help Lesson Details You have the option to input the Teacher name Lesson title Lesson objectives and outcome If these details are completed they will form part of the Student Register should you require one What time does this Lesson finish Enter the time you want the class to finish a timer will appear while the lesson is in progress If you do not want the lesson to be timed enable the Open Lesson option Connect to Select the method to locate and connect to Students 63 NetSupport School 11 41 Click New to create a connection method for your class The Select Startup Mode dialog will appear you can connect by a Room a list of PC names a list of Student logon names or browse the local network to locate Students When the connection method for your class has been defined it appears in the Class Wizard and is available for selection Highlight the required mode and click Select a green tick will appear showing that it is the current method of connection To modify an existing cl
144. ens Restrict student printing Set Approved applications Block Restricted applications Set connection password NetSupport School 11 41 Installing and Configuring NetSupport School on Google Chrome NetSupport School delivers the tools you need to help maximize the effectiveness of computer led teaching in a Google Chrome environment The NetSupport School Student for Google Chrome extension can be installed on each student machine running the Google Chrome OS From the teacher s machine Windows or Chrome OS you can then connect to each Chromebook system enabling you to monitor the screens and interact with each student quickly and efficiently Planning an installation For a teacher to be able to monitor and interact with their students using Google Chromebooks the NetSupport School Name amp Connectivity Server must be installed on a Windows Server the NetSupport School Tutor must be installed on either a Windows computer or on a Google Chrome device and the NetSupport School Student for Google Chrome extension must be installed onto each of the students Chromebooks Note The NetSupport School Tutor for Chrome can only connect to Google Chrome Students Installing the NetSupport School Tutor for Chrome 1 Download the NetSupport School Chrome Tutor app from the Google Play store 2 Locate the NetSupport School Tutor for Chrome app and launch this 3 The NetSupport School Chrome Tutor will start and the Ent
145. enu 2 Check Display Student User Names 3 Click OK 55 NetSupport School 11 41 To Save Students Login Name Enable this option to permanently store the Students login name 1 56 Choose View Current Settings User Interface from the Control window drop down menu Check Remember Student User Login names Click OK NetSupport School 11 41 Working with Classroom Layouts Once you have selected a classroom or group you can rearrange the individual Client icons in the Control List view to reflect the layout of the classroom A background image can also be added to further customise the Control view When using Room mode the classroom layout will be automatically saved against the Room selected When you start the Tutor and select your Room the layout will automatically load Note For information on how to save and load layouts when not in Room mode see our knowledgebase article TD730 at www netsupportsoftware com support 1G NetSupport Schoo MARI School Student Gro J Sty Manage Student Random Class Register Student n J 2 0 8 SA Pesci netics ner beer cies cate cea oid re eee NETSUPPORT S SCHOOL Lesson Details Ready 4 Students Jalsa 1 Tutor Assistant o To arrange icons 1 Select the Client icon and drag it to the desired position 57 NetSupport School 11 41 To lock a layout 1 2 Arrange the Client icons to
146. equired select a background colour Click OK to add the background to the Control window If you are adding the background to an existing Layout choose Layout Save Layout to update To create a new Layout select Layout Save Layout As If you wish to clear the currently set background choose Layout Clear Background 59 NetSupport School 11 41 Power Management Power on Power off Power consumption equates largely with heat generation and increased energy consumption With millions of workstations in use and sometimes hundreds located within the same company or School the desire to conserve energy has grown from a minor issue to a major issue over the last ten years Power Management is a technique that enables hardware and software to reduce system power consumption It works by shutting down portions of the hardware during periods of downtime meaning that the workstation is ready to work when you are and conserve energy when you are not Client Power On To Power on a NetSupport School Client the workstation must have a Wake on LAN network adapter and a BIOS that will support it consult your network adapter documentation for more information the Client must also be Known to the Control The Control sends a Wake on LAN packet to the Client network adapter which instructs the workstation to Power On To Power on a NetSupport School Client 1 Select the icon s of the Clients you wish to Power On 2 C
147. er Licence dialog will appear 4 Enter the licence details you have been provided with and click Licence or click Evaluate to use the software for up to five student Chromebooks for 30 days 5 The Connect dialog will appear 6 Enter the Gateway address port number and security key This must be the same as set in the Name amp Connectivity Server 7 Choose whether to connect to your Google Chrome Students using Room name or Browse mode 8 Click Connect Configure NetSupport School to connect to Google Chrome Students 1 Select School Configuration from the Control drop down window 2 Select Network and Wireless Settings and then select Include Chromebooks 83 NetSupport School 11 41 3 Click Settings 4 Enter the Gateway address port number and security key This must be the same as set in the Name Server 5 Click OK 6 You can now browse for Google Chrome Students in Room mode or using the Fixed List Installing and Configuring the NetSupport School Student for Google Chrome extension 1 Download the NetSupport School Chrome extension from the Google Chrome store https chrome google com webstore 2 Enter the URL chrome settings extensions to access the Extensions configuration page 3 Locate the NetSupport School Student for Google Chrome extension and click Options 4 Enter the Gateway address and port number of the Name amp Connectivity Server Decide what room the Student is going
148. er of devices or seats that connect to and use the software directly or simultaneously e g multiplexing or pooling software or hardware does not reduce the number of licenses required Specifically you must have that number of licenses that would equal the number of distinct inputs to the multiplexing or pooling software or hardware front end If the number of devices or seats that can connect to the software can exceed the number of licenses you have obtained then you must have a reasonable mechanism in place to ensure that your use of the software does not exceed the use limits specified for the licence you have obtained COPYRIGHT This software is protected by international copyright laws You may copy it only for backup purposes The software is licensed to you but not sold to you RESTRICTIONS Neither you nor any reseller may rent lease sell licensed copies on approval or otherwise transfer the right to use this software to another person except that you may sell or give away your original copy as long as you do not keep any copies The software may not be modified disassembled or reverse engineered except with the prior written consent of NetSupport Ltd LIMITED WARRANTY NetSupport Ltd warrants that the software will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying documentation for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of purchase NetSupport s entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be either a t
149. erent ways Choose View Large icons Details or right click in the List view and select one of these options to change the layout of the Student icons The lower panes can be minimised to make more room for the Student thumbnails Click the Y button An icon is displayed next to the Student icon informing the Tutor of the current application in use Large icons Details Name Curent Application Running Applications 3 James NSS 11 Manual Microsoft Word rie aol 1 4 1 gt GY sare I5 cakubtor s P san TV Guide UK TV Listings UK s No 1 TV Listing ste P A E If the application is currently listed in the Approved or Restricted lists then a visual Green Approved or Red Restricted identifier is shown surrounding the application icon to make identification easier If the List view is in Details layout then a list of all other applications running on the Student workstation is also displayed 217 NetSupport School 11 41 When viewing any one of the four layout options the order of the Student and Application icons can also be rearranged by the Tutor Right click in the List view and choose Arrange The Tutor is able to change the layout of the icons using the following options By Name By Current Application By Running Applications By Policy Student icons will be arranged in alphabetical order according to their Client name display name Student Register name Student icons will be
150. ersion Utility This utility allows you to convert Replay Files to video files Note This will be installed by default if you are installing the Tutor or Tech Console component Standalone Test Designer The Test Designer allows you to set customised tests including text picture audio and video questions Note If you are installing the Tutor component the Test Designer will be installed by default Install to By default NetSupport School will be installed in the folder C Program Files NetSupport NetSupport School If you want to install in a different folder click Change Click Next when ready to continue Room Identification Enter the value for the room you wish to connect to The default room value is Eval The room value can be updated later in the Tutor Configuration settings 20 NetSupport School 11 41 Click Next to continue Ready to Install the Program To start the installation click Install To change any of the previous selections click Back To quit the installation click Cancel Note If you have elected to install a Client Student the setup will make the required amendments to your System INI and or registry to load the Client as Windows initialises NetSupport School will not replace any of your existing Drivers Installation Complete To complete the installation e Choose whether to run the Client Configurator This enables you to set basic Client information and sec
151. esigners drop down menu click the Edit Exam icon or right click the exam name and select Edit 3 The Exam Wizard will appear 4 Select the Exam Details or Exam Question tab and edit the required items 5 Click OK 358 NetSupport School 11 41 Delete Exam Although this procedure removes the exam from the Exam Editor window it does not delete the Zip file that is created when an exam is published The exam will therefore still be available to run at Student workstations To Delete an Exam 1 Select the exam in the Tree view 2 Choose Exams Delete Exam from the Designers drop down menu click the Delete Exam icon or right click the exam name and select Delete 3 Confirm that you want to delete the exam Publish Exam Before an exam can be run at Student PCs it must be published This procedure bundles the various elements of the exam questions resources etc into a ZIP file that can be stored in either the default Program Files Tests Folder or in a shared network area of your choosing The latter having the added benefit of enabling other Teachers to access the exam Once published the test can be selected in the Testing Console To Publish an Exam 1 Select the newly created exam in the Tree view 2 Choose Exams Publish Exam from the Designers drop down menu click the Publish Exam icon or right click the exam name and select Publish 3 A window will appear confirming the exam properties Click
152. esources i BBC Learning Art and Design homepage and online courses Basic Skills Building Skills Bet Adult Learning Course Search Online Courses ad Learning Videos Environmental Studies Food and Catering BBC Schools mpute j Gardening Health and Nursing es Information Technology Languages Sharing Unmapped Keyboard r Notes e For acceptable performance while Viewing ensure that the Client s Active Desktop is turned off e If the Client uses multiple monitors you will be able to switch between the desktops by clicking the tabs displayed beneath the View window toolbar To stop Viewing and return to the Control window Choose Client Close from the View window drop down menu There are three modes in which you can View a Client workstation Share The Client s screen will be displayed at both the Control and the Client Both the Control and the Client will be able to enter keystrokes and mouse movements Watch The Client s screen will be displayed at both the Control and the Client Only the Client will be able to enter keystrokes and mouse movements The user at the Control will be locked out Control The Client s screen will be displayed at both the Control and the Client Only the Control will be able to enter keystrokes and mouse movements The Client will be locked out 110 NetSupport School 11 41 To change the Viewing mode 1 While Viewing the Client click the View Mod
153. essenger status for the Students will now show as blocked Clear Instant Messenger History Allows you to clear the Instant Messenger data from the List view This data is not deleted you can view this in the Instant Messenger history 1 Choose IM Clear from the Control window drop down menu 2 The Instant Messenger data will be cleared from the List view 125 NetSupport School 11 41 View Instant Messenger History This feature of Messenger Monitoring enables you to monitor the Messenger activity of connected Students and if required store or print a permanent record 1 2 In Instant Messenger View choose IM History from the Control window drop down menu The Instant Messenger History dialog will appear This provides details of the Students Instant Messenger activity during the currently connected session Show History for Selected Client s All Clients Student Name Login Name Computer Name Instant Messenger User signed in Action Date Time 8 Andy pcijle INVH288 Windows MSN Live Messenger jeap netsupportsoftware com Message Received 14 42 31 18 Jane peijle INVH368 Windows MSN Live Messenger earpjane hotmail com Message Sent 14 42 31 18 Jane pcijle INVH368 Windows MSN Live Messenger earpjane hotmail com Message Received 14 42 15 18 jt Andy peijle INVH288 Windows MSN Live Messenger earp netsupportsoftware com Message Sent 14 42 14 18 Jane peijle INVH368 Windows MSN Live Messenger earmjane hotmail com
154. esses running and installed services As well as the real time reporting NetSupport School also provides the tools security permitting to allow you to remotely stop and start services end applications and more Notes e In order to use the HTML based features within NetSupport School s Inventory options Internet Explorer 4 or above is required e The Inventory is only available from the Tech Console i a W Inventory testing A File View Window Help 98a Refresh Print Export Inventory Inventory Inventory ma Hardware E Software Hot Faes te Fes _ stone lt Booo oo Hardware Inventory Summary XP SP3 Last Updated 05 Jul 2012 09 39 03 System Overview Name XP SP3 Manufacturer Microsoft Corporation Operating System Windove XP Professional Service Pack Service Pack 3 Version 5 1 2600 Registered User testing Physical Memory 64 MB Domain Workgroup WORKGROUP lt Model Virtual Machine Serial Number 76487 112 0189145 22303 Organisation NetSupport System Language English United States System Time Zone GMT GMT Daylight Time Logged on User testing Direct X version 9 0c System Enclosure Desktop Motherboard Processor Intel R Core TM 2 CPU 4300 1 80GHz Clock Speed 1800 MHz 325 To 1 2 3 NetSupport School 11 41 Retrieve a Client Inventory Select the required Client icon in the Control window List view Choose Tools Inventory
155. ew Area Hides the View Menu bar Status bar and Toolbar to uses the maximum possible area to display the Clients screen without switching to full screen mode 111 NetSupport School 11 41 Blanking the Clients screen while Viewing For security reasons you may require the Client screen to be blank while you are remotely controlling it 1 Choose Client Blank screen from the View window drop down menu 2 The Clients screen will be blanked 3 To restore the screen choose Client Blank screen from the View window drop down menu Sending Ctrl Alt Delete while viewing You can send Ctrl Alt Delete to a workstation that you are Viewing To send Ctrl Alt Delete to a Client you are Viewing 1 Press the Ctril Alt Esc keys simultaneously Or 1 Choose Client Send Ctrl Alt Delete from the View window drop down menu 2 Click Yes to confirm Send Ctrl Alt Delete Viewing multiple screens simultaneously NetSupport School enables you to View multiple Clients simultaneously each in its own window You can even scale their individual View Windows to fit on the Control s screen To View multiple screens 1 From the Control window menu or any Client View menu choose Window Tile and then select which NetSupport School Windows you want to display 2 Your chosen Windows will be tiled on the Control s screen If you want to be able to see the entire Client s screen then choose the Scale to Fit option in the toolbar
156. exam is run at the Student machines they will be advised that the question media will only be shown once If this option is selected you will not be able to continue until a resource has been added to the question 349 NetSupport School 11 41 Question Details The Question Details dialog completes the Create Question process Decide where to store the question and whether to add any additional author notes juestion Details exes Question Subjects Authors Information amp Question Title 9 General S Geography Title Countries I Capital Cties 3 Colinin Authors NSS Admin Iceans History 2 Pitoy Ea 5 Notes oo m _ Create Subject ge Select or create a Topic and Subject from the left hand menu then enter the details for the question Once done select the Finish button lt Back _ Finish Cancel Help Stored questions are maintained in an internal database school mdb within the NetSupport School program folder The Question Editor window displays stored questions in a tree view You are able to customise this to your own requirements by creating subjects and topics within each subject The Question Details dialog also displays the Tree view and you can choose whether to add a question to an existing Subject Topic or to create a new area Supporting text can also be added To Add New Subjects and Topics While Creating A Question 1 Select Create Subject and enter an appropriate nam
157. existing Website list 1 2 3 To open an existing Website list choose Web Load Existing Website List Highlight the relevant file and click Open The existing Website list will appear Save an Website list 1 To save a current Website list choose Web Save Website List as from the drop down menu 2 A dialog will appear Enter a file name and click Save 3 The current Website list will be saved Notes Any changes that have been made to the new or existing Website list will be automatically saved when a new Website list is created or when you exit out of the NetSupport School program The default Website list is saved as NetSupport School web 209 NetSupport School 11 41 View Web History This feature of the Web Control Module enables you to monitor the websites being visited by connected Students and if required store or print a permanent record 1 In Web View choose Web History from the Control window drop down menu 2 The Web History dialog will appear This provides details of the sites visited by the Student s during the currently connected session Show History for Selected Client s All Clients Student Name Login Name Computer Name Page Q e pae INVH368 New Tab Jane pcijle INVH368 Google Jane peijle INVH368 New Tab testing XP SP3 Welcome to the home of NetSupport testing XP SP3 Welcome to Facebook Log in sign up or leam more EE p a amp amp C amp i
158. f Japan 99 Edit the items on this page Use the tab at the top of the page to edit other details or press OK to save 351 NetSupport School 11 41 Delete Questions Subjects and Topics A Question can only be deleted if it does not appear in an exam A Subject or Topic can be removed if there are no items beneath it in the Tree the currently selected Sort view determining the extent of the deletion Select the item in the Tree and choose Questions Delete Item from the drop down menu click the Delete Selected Item icon or right click and select Delete You can rename a Subject or Topic by right clicking on the required item and selecting Rename or clicking the Edit Selected Item icon When deleting a Subject or Topic the program will check to see if there are items beneath it in the Tree and depending on the current Sort view if the item appears anywhere else in the Tree When sorted by Subject Type there will only be one occurrence of the item Therefore a Topic will be removed if it does not contain any questions and a Subject if it does not contain any Topics However when sorted by Question Type for example there may be multiple occurrences of the same Subject and Topic in the Tree If you delete the only occurrence of a Geography question in the Multi Choice category that Topic or Subject will be removed from Multi Choice but not from any other category that Geography appears in 352 NetSupport Scho
159. firi aaaea aaa iaa aa Ara Saaidi aAa A 114 Scanning StUGENES ei are EE E A aa s 116 Scanning multiple screens simultaneously sssssssesrrsrrrrrsrrerrrrrs 119 Monit r Mode Seeram iea a a a A a aa a a 121 Messenger MONitOrinG cccececceeeeee eee eee eee ee eee ee eee eee e eee dandanan aanika 124 View Instant Messenger HiStOry ccccecceseeeeee teens eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 126 Keyboard Monitoring siciiniicecseccececersdeccadacadaedenedensciasavdes at adecenaa caves 128 NetSupport School 11 41 Setting UP Word Lists ices nen dadeate deen a EA 130 View TYPING HIStOLy osc cceeecec eee ee reece eee eee eee nee eens e nee eee anandan itana 132 Sereen Gapture ins aier ra aa ae a E tbl devab evade A R TE 134 Capture a Students screen whilst Viewing ssssssssssssrrssrrrersrrerrrrrs 134 Capture a Students screen whilst Scanning ssssssssessrssrsrrrsrrsrreres 135 SHOWING to Students sassi sce eet saceaceuetaede ea vekue checetenes aa a a aii 136 Show L eaderan Atna eaa aaa aa ad a a AA a a aa Ae aE bide 141 Exhibit Showing a Student s screen on Student screens 143 Interactive Whiteboard niise sani asinan dankinda aii aae aaa 145 AMMOCALING SCrEEN Siraan a a EAE a a a e aa Naia 148 Annotate Toolbar iiti anani a e 149 A dio MORICOMING 2 aaea a aaraa ea ri A PE ANETE A E TENIA 151 Using A dio S p O T a er aaa aaa ea eaaa aA E a a AEAEE AEEA 155 The Announce Function as inisini aa aaan 155 Using Audio while Viewing ssssssss
160. forced to choose an Approved Site rather than being able to surf at will Activate the Restricted Site List The Student will not be able to view url s that are in the restricted list but will be able to view all other url s Block all access to the Internet Activate Safe Search mode Stops inappropriate web sites being displayed while Students are using search engines Activate Block FTP sites Block Students from accessing FTP sites Notes e A padlock will be displayed next to the Web Control view icon when there are global policy restrictions in force You can override the restrictions in the Tutor configuration e Safe Search Block FTP Approved only and Block restricted functions are not currently available for NetSupport Assist Students The Web Control Module can be used to perform the following functions Identify Websites currently running on the Student workstation In the List View the Student icons can be viewed in two different ways Choose View Large icons Details or right click in the List view and select one of these options to change the layout of the Student icons The lower panes can be minimised to make more room for the Student thumbnails Click the button 200 NetSupport School 11 41 An icon is displayed next to the Student icon informing the Tutor of the current Student activity This icon will be the default Internet Explorer icon or a personalised url icon Large
161. from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Save icon at the bottom of the survey pane Print Survey Results Before clearing the survey you can print a permanent record of the results 1 Choose Survey Print Results from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Print icon displayed at the bottom of the Survey pane Note The Student results can be added to the Student Journal choose Survey Add Results to Journal from the Control window drop down menu or click the Add Survey Results to Journal icon 229 NetSupport School 11 41 Survey Lists Surveys can be re used by adding them to a Survey List NetSupport School provides a default list NetSupport School sul into which questions and responses are automatically stored but you can create custom lists if you want to categorise different types of question Create a Survey List 1 In Survey view choose Survey Create New Survey List from the Control window drop down menu 2 Enter a name for the file and click Create 3 Any new Surveys you enter will be added to the list Load a Survey List 1 In Survey view choose Survey Load Existing Survey List from the Control window drop down menu 2 Select the required list and click Open Using Survey Lists With the required Survey List loaded you can enter new questions or use and manage previously stored questions and responses To Add a New Question to a Survey List 1 Inthe Stude
162. get IP Address followed by the Subnet mask or enter the required Address Range Enter IP Browse Address Advanced Subnet Address Range From IP address 10 0 0 255 To IP address 10 0 2 259 Terminal Services Cancel Help lt lt Advanced 75 NetSupport School 11 41 6 Click OK Notes When adding the address of a remote subnet you must ensure that the broadcast address for the local subnet is also present If not the Control will not find any local clients when you perform a browse Some network Routers will suppress broadcast packets from being transmitted across WAN links If this is the case then even if the Control is correctly configured you will not be able to browse the remote subnet 76 NetSupport School 11 41 Understanding IP Addresses An IP address is made up of 4 bytes each byte being made up of eight bits which can have a value of 1 or 0 This gives possible IP addresses of 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Each IP address is also split into two portions a network portion which identifies the network the device is on and the local or host portion which identifies a particular device The subnet mask defines the position of this split between the network and host portions of the address which is associated with the address The subnet mask is also a four byte number Each bit in the subnet mask that is set to 1 denotes that the corresponding bit in the IP address
163. h Environmental Studies Food and Catering Der z c course Seach ME R ions toaring Online Courses f Learning Videos BBC Schools Gardening Health and Nursing History Eag Nations Homes Dec Information Technology Northern Ireland Languages Dien niens re d t Legal and Consumer X g The toolbar buttons for a single Client Scan Window have the following functions Previous Auto and Next buttons You can turn auto timing on or off from the Scan window toolbar or choose to move forwards or backwards between individual Clients The Previous button shows the previous Client screen scanned The Next button shows the next Clients screen in the scan cycle Scaling to Fit It may be that the Client is running in a higher resolution than the Control In this case choosing the Scale to Fit button will re size its screen to fit the window in which it is displayed Full Screen When Scanning in full screen mode you can use the Scan Floating toolbar to Control the operation 117 NetSupport School 11 41 Capture A snapshot of the current Client view window will be taken You will then have the option to name and save the current screen contents to a file To end the Scan 1 Choose Scan Close from the Scan window drop down menu 118 NetSupport School 11 41 Scanning multiple screens simultaneously Multiple Client screens can be scanned simultaneously in one Scan window To Scan multiple sc
164. hat will be remote controlled By installing this component you are enabling a Tutor machine to establish a link with the Student The range of features available to students is limited to those that enable them to communicate with the teacher for example sending a help request 18 NetSupport School 11 41 Install Configurator The NetSupport School Student Configurator is used to customise the Student setup at each workstation For example setting the Transport to be used allocating a Student name and setting security When you choose the Student component you will also be given the option of installing the Student Configurator Clear this checkbox if you do not want to install the component you can still configure the Student machine by running the Student Configurator at a later stage of this installation Add Configurator Start Menu Shortcut Choose whether to create a Start Menu shortcut to the Student Configurator at the Student workstation The advantage of installing this at the Student machine is that it is easier to make changes to the settings in the future The disadvantage is that the Students themselves could access the option and make changes Note If you re installing the Tutor component the Student Configurator will be installed by default Tutor Console This component the Control should be installed on workstations which will be used to remote control other PCs It gives teachers access to NetSupp
165. hatting to Clients 171 disable at Client 272 the chat window 173 class lists create class lists 72 class wizard 63 Client arrange icons 57 as a show leader 140 audio settings 270 audio support 154 clipboard 113 configure 265 configure advanced settings 273 configure security 268 configure transport 266 connecting to a class 70 connecting to at installation 43 connecting to at startup 62 customise icons 103 exhibit a Client screen 142 group leader 100 help requests sending 178 record activity 161 remote installation 26 save login name 56 scan screens 115 sign in 52 transfer files between Clients 182 user interface configuration 271 viewing screens 108 client disconnects 74 clipboard 113 co browser 211 lock unlock students in the co browser 213 using the co browser 212 combo list question 339 configure remote control settings 295 audio settings 303 file transfer settings 305 group leader settings 314 replay file settings 302 371 NetSupport School 11 41 student toolbar settings 315 student user interface settings 310 tutor journal settings 316 tutor keyboard mouse settings 300 tutor user interface settings 308 tutor view settings 297 configure the Client advanced settings 273 audio settings 270 enable name server 266 security 268 transport 266 user interface settings 271 configure the Client 265 configure the Control 279 administration options 290 enab
166. he time runs out 368 NetSupport School 11 41 Question Area The main body of the window displays the question and depending on the question type the associated options Buttons are provided to view any resources that may have been included pictures videos or sound clips and a reference button is available which provides Students with tips on how to answer the particular type of question Navigation Buttons In addition to the numbered buttons in the question list navigation buttons are also available at the bottom of the window enabling Students to move between questions When they have completed the exam they click Finished When the exam has finished the Tutor has the option to show Students their results and if required include the answers The Test Player will re open at the Student workstations enabling them to view each question in turn The window will indicate which questions they got right wrong or in the case of questions that have multiple answers partially correct If the Tutor has chosen to include the answers a Show Answers button will appear enabling the Student to toggle between their response and the correct answers 369 NetSupport School 11 41 CONTACT US If you have any comments regarding the design installation configuration or operation of this package please contact us UK amp International www netsupportsoftware com Technical Support support netsupportsoftware com Sales UK amp
167. he Create New Question icon or right click a question and select Create Question True or false Mutt True or false Please select one of the question types above Select the required Question Type and click Create Note Questions can also be created in the Exam Editor at the time you compile a test The eight question types are Multi Choice The Student is required to pick the correct answer from up to four possible options Drag And Drop Text Students must try to complete a statement by adding a word or phrase from the alternatives provided 336 NetSupport School 11 41 Drag And Drop Image Students must match an image with the appropriate statement Combo List Students are presented with up to four questions and need to select the correct answer from a drop down list You can insert additional decoy answers into the list Label Image You provide students with a picture that has various areas marked The student needs to label each area correctly True or False The Students are provided with a statement and they must decide whether this is true or false Multi True or False Students are presented with up to four statements and must decide whether they are true or false Order Items The Students are required to place the items in the correct order 337 NetSupport School 11 41 Multi Choice Students select the correct answer from up to four possibilities The first s
168. he hardware that is often part of an ICT system This is why your GCSE is not just about computers but about how why and when people use them It is the power of computers and communications that has allowed ICT systems to become so important Like any piece of equipment the important thing about it is what it lets us do ICT Systems are used in a number of environments such as offices shops factories aircraft ships They re also used in fields such as communications medicine farming 6 Activity A E Find out more about ICT systems O Links elec k ALAMA Bringing you gadgets and tech news galore On bbc co uk BBC Webwise On the web GCSE ICT Companion ICT Dictionaries and Encyclopaedias Webopedia Online Computer Dictionary for 212 NetSupport School 11 41 Using the Co Browser Using the Co Browser is a very straightforward process with a simple to use interface Once the Co Browser is active on the selected Students screens you can guide Students through a variety of web pages to suit the needs of your lesson You can view multiple websites by creating new tabs which allows you to easily switch between different web sites To Create a New tab 1 Select File New tab from the Co Browser drop down menu 2 Anew tab will appear Enter the website address in the Address bar and select Go 3 The website will be displayed under the new tab To Approv
169. he replacement of the defective software or b return of the price paid This remedy shall be at NetSupport s option and subject to proof of purchase from an authorised source NetSupport School 11 41 Any implied warranties including any warranties of quality or fitness for a particular purpose are limited to the terms of the express warranties NetSupport Ltd Shall not in any event be liable for loss of profits data or information of any kind or for special incidental consequential indirect or other similar damages arising from any breach of these warranties or use of the software even if they have been advised of the possibility of such damages Some countries do not allow the limitation or exclusion of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you This warranty does not affect your statutory rights and you may have other rights that vary from country to country In any event NetSupport s maximum liability shall not exceed the price paid by the end user licensee TERMINATION You may terminate this licence and this Agreement at any time by destroying the program and its documentation together with any copies in any form NetSupport Ltd may terminate this licence forthwith by notice in writing to you if you commit any serious breach of any term of this licence and in the case of a breach capable of being remedied shall have failed within 30 days after receipt of a request in writing from
170. headphones while they are watching a video the sound coming from each workstation can be distracting This option turns audio off at the Client workstations but leaves it on at the Tutor machine Help Menu Provides access to the on line Help and general Version information 161 NetSupport School 11 41 Using Replay Files When a Tutor remote controls a Student workstation they can record the screen keyboard and mouse activity taking place In addition if the PCs are configured for audio any narration that takes place can also be recorded The information is stored in a file that can be replayed at the Tutor machine and if required shown to other Students The Replay facility can be configured to record at all or individual Student machines Local activity at the Tutor machine can also be recorded Once enabled activity is recorded as soon as a View session is opened Recording stops when the View session is closed at which point the stored Replay File becomes available for playback A Show session can also be recorded enabling Clients to playback the demonstration at their convenience By default a Replay file is saved as a rpf file these can be converted to AVI or WMV video files Pre set options will be provided for converting Replay files to video files More advanced users can access the Replay conversion utility where you can control video resolution audio quality start and end points of the video and much more
171. heck that the url website address is correct Type in the Description e g NetSupport School this is optional Click OK The url icon and description will appear under the Approved or Restricted List D oe 204 NetSupport School 11 41 1 Choose View lt Details Right click a url icon in the List View under Current Web Site or All Web Sites 3 Choose Add to Approved List Or Choose Add to Restricted List 4 The url icon and description will appear under the Approved or Restricted List Note You can also add a URL to the Approved or Restricted list from the Co Browser Remove a website from your approved or restricted List 1 To remove a url from the list simply highlight the chosen url and click x Or Right click in the list boxes and select Remove Site Apply approved or restricted websites Restrictions can be applied to individual Students or all connected Students Students can view the current restrictions in the Student Toolbar 1 If you want to apply restrictions to individual Students select their icons in the List View 2 To apply these restrictions choose Web Allow Approved Websites Only or Block Restricted Websites Or Click the relevant restriction icon at the bottom of the Control window Or Click the Web Access icon on the Control toolbar and choose Approved Only or Block Restricted 3 To acknowledge which restriction has been activated an appropriate indicator will appear next
172. help needed and red for urgent help needed 179 NetSupport School 11 41 The Tutor can request support directly from a lab technician or network manager a Get Support icon will be displayed in the Control window toolbar allowing the Tutor to chat or send a message directly to the lab technician or network manager This feature will need to be enabled in the Tech Console speak to your lab technician or network manager for further information If a Student raises a Help Request an alert will be raised at the Tutor provided it currently has that Student connected Any outstanding Help Requests will be visible to the Tutor with a Help Request icon displayed next to the Student and a badge indicating the number of outstanding help requests on the toolbar This will show until that Help Request has been cleared 2 Year 8 34 Year 10 Sar To display current Help Requests 1 Choose School Help Requests from the Control window drop down menu bar Or Click the Help Request icon on the toolbar 2 The Help request window will open and list the Requests If there are any help requests pending since the last time the Control connected to the Client the Help Request window will be open as the Control initialises 3 By clicking on the View Client or Chat toolbar buttons you can reply to the Clients Help Request Note If a Student has raised an alert at the Tutor the Student icon at the Tutor will change colour to notify the
173. hen be able to pick a team from a drop down list Click OK 4 The newly created group s will appear as a tab on the Group bar Note You can ungroup students by selecting Group Ungroup from the Control window drop down menu To change the members of a group 1 Choose Group Properties from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Properties icon on the Group bar Or Click the Properties icon in the Control window 2 Choose the Members tab and simply select the Client to be removed or added 3 Click OK when you are happy with the members of the group 1 Right click the selected Client icons and choose Remove from Group 100 NetSupport School 11 41 Group Leaders When working with defined groups of Clients the Control can assign Group Leader status to a selected member of the group The designated Leader can then take control of the group performing many of the tasks that the main Control can The main Control retains overall responsibility while a Group Leader is in place and can remove the status at any time To select the features to be made available to a Group Leader choose View Current Settings Group Leaders from the Control window drop down menu Visual Group Leader connections can be displayed allowing you easily see the link between a Group Leader and their Students in all views Check Show Visual Group Leader Connections to enable this feature All Group Leader features are enab
174. his box is checked when the Control initialises it will connect to all Clients and immediately start Showing the Controls screen to them Start Scanning If this box is checked when the Control initialises it will connect to all Clients and immediately start Scanning them Display Class Wizard If this box is checked the Class Wizard will appear at startup 281 NetSupport School 11 41 Tutor will be used to connect to students within a Centralised Computing Environment Requires restart Allows NetSupport School to connect to Students within a Centralised Computing environment A restart will be required Tutor will be used to connect to students using Tablets Requires restart Allows the NetSupport School Tutor to connect to Students using a Tablet A restart will be required Tutor will be used to connect to students using Chromebooks Requires restart Allows the NetSupport School Tutor to connect to Students using Google Chromebooks A restart will be required Tutor Startup Restrictions Access levels and restrictions for NetSupport School features can now be defined at startup ensuring they come into force as soon as the Tutor is started Settings for Configuration NetSupport School a Start Options Startup mode t Web Unrestricted Access V Apply central policy rmance Applications ce amp cident Selection Allow Approved Applications Only X V Apply central policy W t Net
175. hoose Student Power Management Power On from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Manage icon on the Control toolbar and choose Power On 3 The Client workstations will now Power On 60 NetSupport School 11 41 Client Power Off NetSupport School uses the Advanced Power Management APM features of the Windows operating system where supported to provide Client power down capabilities APM relies on the Client workstation having an ATX motherboard and ATX power supply A Control can remotely Power Off a Client workstation using the NetSupport School Power Management function To Power off a NetSupport School Client 1 Ensure all open applications at the Client workstations are closed 2 Select the icon s of the Clients you wish to power off 3 Choose Student Power Management Power Off from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Manage icon drop down arrow on the Control toolbar and select Power Off Or If displayed click the Power Off icon on the toolbar 4 The Client workstations will now power off 61 NetSupport School 11 41 Finding and Connecting to Students The Class Wizard enables the Tutor to select the connection mode that best suits their requirements The Class Wizard is displayed when the Tutor program is initially started and when a class is restarted You can also specify how Students are connected to and configure these settings in the Tutor Configuration select Scho
176. how hide the Student toolbar by selecting View Student Toolbar Show Hide from the Control window drop down menu or by clicking the Toolbar icon on the Control window toolbar The following Toolbar options can be turned on or off as required Shows the Image associated with this Student Shows the Students logged on name or the name entered on the Student Register Class and Teacher information Show amount of time left in the Lesson Indicate when typing is being monitor Show Instant Messenger metering state Shows the current Printer status Blocked Paused etc Show Application monitoring status and give access to approved Applications Show Internet monitoring status and give access to approved Web sites Allow the Student to Initiate a Chat Displays the Student icon image Shows the Students logged on name or the name entered on the Student Register Displays details of the current class Tutor name subject and room If a timed lesson is in progress indicates the time remaining Advises the Student when keyboard monitoring is active Indicates the current status of Messenger Monitoring Shows the current Printer status Blocked Paused etc Indicates to Students the current status of Application Monitoring Restricted or Unrestricted access If Restrictions apply the list of approved applications will be displayed when Students click the Toolbar icon Indicates to Students the c
177. iOS NetSupport School delivers the tools you need to help maximise the effectiveness of computer led teaching on iOS devices The NetSupport School Student for iOS can be installed on each iOS device From the teacher s desktop you can then connect to each system enabling you to interact with each student quickly and efficiently The NetSupport School Student for iOS app works on iOS v6 0 or later and is available for free from the iTunes store Set up and configure the NetSupport School Student for iOS You can pre configure each device with the required password protected classroom connectivity settings from the device or push the settings to each device from within the NetSupport School Tutor program 1 Select School Tablet Apply Student Settings from the Control drop down window 2 The Student Settings dialog will appear 88 NetSupport School 11 41 Select the students you wish to send the settings to To amend the configuration settings click Modify The Modify Student Settings dialog will appear Set the required options and click Save If a password has already been set at the iOS device enter this Click Send You can now browse for iOS Students in Room mode SOOO ON le If you selected the Tablet students only licence type during installation the NetSupport School Tutor will only display the features that are supported for Tablet Students Features supported on iOS Student Register Lesson ob
178. iding a real time insight into Student activity during a class The Tutor can monitor the entire class quickly viewing any typed content and keeping an eye on Student activity levels To further enhance the monitoring process a Tutor can create Target and Inappropriate words lists when a Student types a word on the list it will be immediately highlighted The keyboard monitor also provides a perfect monitoring tool when Students are online in forums or search forms Note Keyboard Monitoring is not available in the following languages Korean Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Arabic Japanese and Russian E coogi wadon mamet pte Ready History Year 2 4 Students All 4 Tutor Assistant In Typing mode you can view details of Target or Inappropriate words and use the available icons to e Create a new word list e Load an existing word list e Monitor Student Typing activity 128 NetSupport School 11 41 Note Details layout is the default layout you will be unable to view Keyboard monitoring in any other layout The lower panes can be minimised to make more room for the Student thumbnails Click the Y button The current application will be displayed along with the text the Student is typing any Target or Inappropriate words will be identified with either a green Target or red Inappropriate visual indicator A count of how many Target Inappropriate words that have been typed by
179. ientlane Contents of CA Fie 25S E Remote Computer Jane Name k Type File Description Modified BE Desktop 4 Previous Folder B eaea a9 E Config Msi File Folder 25 06 2012 17 10 02 a pey i E Documents and Settings File Folder 11 08 2010 10 11 26 compact bise LJ Nsm_pos File Folder 12 11 2009 10 28 00 EE Data L Program Files File Folder 04 11 2011 13 51 00 literature on uk pci group Data L LRH File Folder 06 05 2008 16 10 16 MT Common on uk pci group Data M Ll temp File Folder 06 05 2010 09 01 34 SF delivery on pcifile001 N L urzipped File Folder 23 04 2008 11 56 56 OFFICE on uk pci group Data 0 LJ winpows File Folder 26 06 2012 09 49 44 EE PCI Product Databases on uk pci group Data L err File 26 11 2007 16 45 02 EF Marketing on uk pci group data R _ D Amystgn WLF WLF File 21 12 2007 12 37 08 E Si insane an ino TOBE vea p Sjauzoevee ear Windnsaie Date Cila inrnrang sores Ready 14 Files 994 791 bytes auf The Control s folder structure and the files in each folder are displayed in the top half of the window The Client s folder structure and the files in each folder are displayed in the lower half of the window To copy files and folders from a Control to a Client 1 Select the required Client in the List view 2 Click the File Transfer icon on the toolbar and choose File Transfer Or Choose Student File Transfer from the Control window drop down menu Or
180. ients are connected to Selecting this option enables you to create a class that the Clients students themselves can join Notes e Publish Class feature only supported over TCP IP connections e Publish Class feature is not supported in Terminal Services environments e Ifthe expected Clients are not found it may be because NetSupport School has not been configured to browse the required Networks See Configuring NetSupport School For Subnet Browsing for more information e If connecting to Students via the Name amp Connectivity Server in either Room or Publish Class mode it is necessary to set the Name amp Connectivity Server settings at the Tutor in both the Tutor Configurator and the Client Configurator e Publish Class is not supported on Tutor machines running Windows Vista or above 290 NetSupport School 11 41 NetSupport Protect Switch Desktop Protection Off NetSupport s desktop security product NetSupport Protect compliments NetSupport School s range of functionality by further protecting Windows operating systems and desktops from unwanted or malicious changes If NetSupport Protect is installed on the Student machine you may need to disable the protection in order to conduct your remote control session To Disable NetSupport Protect choose School Configuration NetSupport Protect from the Control window drop down menu Settings for Configuration NetSupport School E Disable
181. if required store or print a permanent record 1 In Print view choose Print History from the Control window drop down menu 2 The Print History dialog will appear This provides details of the Students print activity during the currently connected session All Clients Student Name Login Name Computer Name Printer Document Pages Printed On 9 Andy Andy INVH288 Adobe PDF Microsoft Word Acr19A 0 11 37 09 19 01 2012 amp 9 Andy Andy INVH288 Adobe PDF Microsoft Word History Essay 0 11 36 40 19 01 2012 a Refresh save Epot _ Print The available options are Show History for The list can be viewed by currently Selected Client or All Connected Clients Refresh While viewing the list click Refresh at any time to update the display 248 NetSupport School 11 41 Save To keep a permanent record of the displayed items you can save the details to a text file before disconnecting Print Prints details of the currently displayed items Export Exports data to a CSV file allowing the data to be imported if needed Close Closes the History dialog but details will continue to be recorded while the Control is connected 249 NetSupport School 11 41 Device Control The Device Control feature allows the Tutor to protect against external sources during a Lesson The Tutor can prevent data from being copied to or from USB devices and CD DVD drives In addition the Tuto
182. ify where the Replay Files are to be stored Click OK 163 NetSupport School 11 41 Record Replay Files for Individual Students This procedure enables Replay Files to be created at selected Student workstations 1 View the required Student machine Choose View Settings for Client Replay Files from the View window drop down menu The Replay Files dialog will appear Settings for Client INVH338 f 4 Remote Control Replay Files View VY Record Replay Files Keyboard Mouse Include Audio 2 Replay Files i Prefix Files With Client Name J Audio In Directory Browse l OK l Cancel Apply Help Enable the Record Replay Files check box A Replay file will be created each time the Tutor opens a view session at this Student machine Include Audio In addition to the screen mouse and keyboard activity if the workstation is configured for Audio you can record any microphone narration from the Tutor Check this box to enable Note Desktop sounds music etc are unable to be recorded 164 Prefix Files With Client name In order to identify each Replay file filenames are prefixed with the Client name and the date time of the recording Alternatively by unchecking this box the files will be named sequentially in the format 00000001 rpf etc In Folder Specify where the Replay Files are to be stored A separate folder can be specified for each Student NetSupport Schoo
183. ile and set the required properties Click Start Encoding on 170 NetSupport School 11 41 Show Application The Show feature enables you to display the Control screen to Students However if a number of programs are open at the Control there may be occasions when you want to show a single application in isolation To Show an Application 1 4 Choose Student Show Show Application from the Control window drop down menu Or Right click a selected Client icon and choose Show Application Or Click the Show Menu icon on the Control toolbar and choose Show Application The Show Application dialog will appear NetSupport School Show Application sc Application l l Select a Cancel Drag the icon to the Application you want to Show or click Select 45 Help Drag the icon to the required application on the Controls desktop and release A pink border will appear around the selected application as you move the mouse around the desktop Or Click Select and choose the application from the displayed list Note NetSupport School will identify if the Control is running multiple monitors giving you the option to confirm which one the selected application is sited on If you are unsure which the correct screen is click Identify If only one monitor is detected select Whole Desktop Click Show 171 NetSupport School 11 41 Chatting to Students NetSupport School allo
184. ill be required to view the Journal By default the Student Journal is located in Windows Vista and above C Users Logged on User Documents Journal Windows XP and below C Documents and Settings Logged on User My Documents Journal To change the location choose Start Programs NetSupport School NetSupport School Student Configurator Journal On Windows 8 machines right click in the Start screen and choose All Apps at the bottom of the screen Click the NetSupport School Student Configurator icon Items that can be included within the Journal are e Lesson details and objectives e URLs of websites used during the lesson e Copies of any class Chat transcripts e Class or group Survey Results e Individual Student Test results e Virtual Whiteboard screens e Screenshots from within a Presentation and supporting explanation e Target keywords e Teacher Notes e Individual Student Notes 256 NetSupport School 11 41 e New chapters File Edit View Document Tools Advanced Window Help fi com D A Game Bem AB see DE cresteror P Review Scomment v secure ff Sgn D0 ipi E owm Jane Earp Tutor Mercury Jupiter Satur Puto Approved Websites S URL an wikipeda ergiwikiSolar_System a TE An image displaying the Solar System Please ensure that your essay on the Solar System is handed in by the end of the lesson on Thursday p 8
185. indow 2 The Announce dialog box will appear include green tick or exclude red cross Clients from the announcement then click the Announce button 3 A dialog box will then appear indicating that you can now announce Click OK when you have finished speaking 155 NetSupport School 11 41 Using Audio while Viewing When Viewing a Client you can conduct a two way audible chat session To use Audio while Viewing 1 Click the Audio button on the toolbar in the View window 2 The Audio options will be displayed From here you can e Turn Audio on or off e Enable only the Control or the Client to talk e Set the microphone sensitivity e Select the Audio Quality The Mute toolbar button toggles the speaker and microphone on and off Using Audio while Showing When Showing to a Client you can conduct a two way audible chat session To use Audio while Showing 1 In the Show Configuration dialog box select the Enable Audio Support check box 2 During the show only the Control has Announce functionality The Audio settings set in the Control Configurator Audio option will apply during these sessions 156 NetSupport School 11 41 Adjusting Audio settings You can adjust the audio settings within NetSupport School to match the capabilities of your multimedia workstations or to fine tune performance However you should note that the higher the quality of sound you select the greater the volume of data that needs t
186. ing you to see in an instant who selected the same answer This could be useful if you felt a quick follow up question or message to particular Students was required fiew Survey Layout Planner Journal Window Help a 192 G az BE 2 or E a E aam E Journal how ile lect Lock Unlock Blank jeb Co Bromse Manage jenu Transfer Wod cess NETSUPPORT SCHOOL Me Question What year wae the battle of Hastings Response 1066 1087 Unavailable SJHistory Year 2 4 Students Alloa Tutor Assistant The basic procedure for sending a survey to Students is 1 Choose View Mode Survey View from the Control window drop down menu Or Select the Student Survey icon from the left hand side of the Control window 227 NetSupport School 11 41 Select the Students to include in the survey This can be all Students in the list view selected Students or a defined group of Students Enter a question in the box provided Select the responses answers to the question These can either be chosen from the drop down list of defaults or you can enter your own options using a comma to separate each one Up to 6 choices can be entered Send the survey to Students by choosing Survey Send from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Send icon displayed at the bottom of the Survey pane A dialog will open at the Student machines displaying the question and respo
187. ion Click OK The application icon will be displayed in the Launch Application dialog and saved for future use Note If you only want to execute applications to Clients that are logged on select the option Execute Only if the Client is Logged on Select the required application and click Launch 193 NetSupport School 11 41 Launch an application on a Student workstation whilst Viewing 1 Choose Client Launch Application from the View window drop down menu Or Click the Launch Application icon on the toolbar 2 The Execute at Client dialog will appear 3 Select the required application and click Launch 4 Select the application to launch or click Add to add a new one Quick Launch Enables you to launch an application or web site to Students without having to direct your way through the drop down menus EC y Quick Launch a b AA Launch applications and web sites at students v e 88 a iexplore wmplayer notepad 1 Click Quick Launch on the toolbar 2 Click Add Item and select to add either an application or web site Or Drag the required application into the window 3 Right click the required application or web site and select Launch at Students Note You can edit the properties of a saved application or web site Right click the required item in the Quick Launch window and click Properties 194 NetSupport School 11 41 To edit a saved Executable applicat
188. ion 1 Open the Execute Application dialog 2 Select the Application to edit 3 Click Properties 4 Edit the required details and click OK 5 Click Close To remove a saved Executable application 1 Open the Execute Application dialog 2 Select the Application to remove 3 Click Remove 4 Click Close 195 NetSupport School 11 41 User Defined Tools As well as allowing a Tutor to launch applications at Student workstations you can automatically run a task on a Tutor workstation using a Defined Tool To Add a Tool 1 Choose School Tools Edit from the Control window drop down menu 2 The User Defined Tool dialog will appear User Defined Tools pza Tools Menu Text Path Arguments Close Click the Add button 3 4 The Add Tool dialog will appear 5 Enter the required information 6 Click OK The new tool will be listed on the Tools menu 7 Click Close To run a Tool 1 Choose School Tools from the Control window drop down menus 2 Select the tool you wish to run The Tool will automatically run To Edit a Tool 1 Choose School Tools Edit from the Control window drop down menus The User Defined Tool dialog will appear Select the tool you wish to edit Click the Edit button The Edit dialog will appear Edit the appropriate information click OK La aie a 196 NetSupport School 11 41 To Delete a Tool 1 OBR WN Choose School Tools Ed
189. ir answer before they click A time limit for answering the question can also be set You can choose to exclude a Student from the next round if they have already answered a question ensuring all Students have a fair chance to answer a question Question and Answer Mode Enter an Answer Question Type The teacher enters the answer to the next question in advance and then verbally asks the question Students are prompted to enter their answer Results are instantly displayed to the class and rewards can be awarded or deducted Note You can determine whether the answer is case sensitive or not A thinking time limit can be applied the Answer button is disabled during this period giving Students a chance to think about their answer before they click A time limit for answering the question can also be set 235 NetSupport School 11 41 You can choose to exclude a Student from the next round if they have already answered a question ensuring all Students have a fair chance to answer a question Question and Answer Mode Pot Luck Question Type The teacher decides how many Students to select randomly NetSupport School will pick and order them A Student is then randomly selected and you verbally ask a question and the Student answers You then decide whether this is correct or not and have the option to bounce the question to another random Student Rewards can be awarded or deducted Note Questions can be bounced whe
190. ired print job s in the Print Queue 2 Right click and choose Delete Delete All Delete All jobs for Test20 3 The selected print job s will be deleted Deleting Duplicate Print Jobs 1 Choose Print Delete Duplicates from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Duplicate icon at the bottom of the Control window 2 Duplicate print jobs will now be deleted 246 NetSupport School 11 41 Resume Printing Allows you to restart printing after it has been paused or blocked 1 3 Select the required Students in the List view Choose Print Resume Printing from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Unrestricted icon at the bottom of the Control window Printing will now be resumed Select the required printer in the Printer list Right click and choose Resume Printing will be resumed for the selected printer Note You can also resume printing for Student s in the Print Queue Select the required print job right click and choose Resume Printer Properties Allows you to change the image display name of the printer and reset the total page and job count 1 Select the Printer icon in the List view Or Select the required printer in the Printer list Right click and choose Properties Amend the required properties 247 NetSupport School 11 41 View Print History This feature of Print Management enables you to monitor the print usage of connected Students and
191. it from the Control window drop down menus The User Defined Tool dialog will appear Select the tool you wish to delete Click the Delete button A confirmation dialog will appear click Yes The Tool will be removed 197 NetSupport School 11 41 Rebooting or Logging out Students Having connected to a Client or group of Clients you are able to remotely Logout or Reboot the Client workstations at the end of a session This is a simple way to prepare multiple workstations for the next group of students To Reboot or Logout a Client 1 2 4 Select a Client or group of Clients Choose Student Power Management Reboot or Logout from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Manage icon drop down arrow on the Control toolbar and select Reboot or Logout Or If displayed click the Reboot or Logout icon on the toolbar A message will appear confirming the Client s included in the Reboot Logout Click Yes to continue To Reboot or Logout a Client whilst Viewing 1 198 Choose Client Reboot or Logout from the View window drop down menu A message will appear confirming the Client included in the Reboot Logout Click Yes to continue NetSupport School 11 41 Web Control Module The Web Control Module is used to monitor and control the websites visited by connected Students A record of sites visited in a session can be stored and if required the Tutor can restrict or approve the use
192. jective Receive Messages from the Tutor Student Request help Group or 1 1 Chat Student Survey Real Time Instruction Show Mode Battery indicators Licensing for Tablets Each Android or iOS Tablet that connects to the NetSupport School Tutor needs to be licensed Licences for Tablets can be purchased independently of the main NetSupport School product and are registered with NetSupport School by loading a new Licence file NST LIC This file controls the number of Tablet Students that can connect If this file is not present then the usual Licence File NSM LIC will allow Tablet Students to connect but this will reduce the Licence count available for NetSupport School Students e g With both an NSM LIC 10 User and NST LIC 10 user the software will independently limit to 10 connections of each type With 10 NetSupport School Students connected the 11th Tablet Student would be rejected With just a NSM LIC 20 User the software would limit to a maximum of 20 connections of regardless of whether they are from Tablet Student or standard NetSupport School Students 89 NetSupport School 11 41 Using NetSupport School in a wireless classroom It is recognised that wireless networks generally do not perform as reliably as wired networks as they use radio frequencies to transmit data and these are susceptible to interference In addition simultaneously connecting a large number of devices to a wireless access point will
193. k any remote computers not using encrypted communications Earlier versions of the Control and Client programs do not support the enhanced level of encryption Selecting this option will block connections from remote computers running versions of the Control or Client software that does not support this 98 NetSupport School 11 41 Working with Groups NetSupport School provides you with sophisticated grouping functions to enable you to manage and organise different groups of Students You can use the following functions on groups as a whole Show File Distribution Scan Execute Message Lock Unlock Multimedia Support Send Collect Work Chat To create a group 1 Choose Group New from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the New Group icon on the Group bar Or Right click the selected Client icons and choose Add to Group and select New 2 A Group Wizard dialog box appears that asks you to provide a name and brief description of the group It will then assist you in creating your group Your newly created group will appear as a tab on the Group bar for quick access 99 NetSupport School 11 41 Group Students Randomly 1 Choose Group Group Randomly from the Control window drop down menu 2 The Group Randomly dialog will appear 3 Select how to group the teams If randomly enter the number of teams If Student chooses team enter the team names the Students will t
194. l 11 41 7 Click OK Recording will start immediately close the View session to stop recording 8 Repeat steps 1 7 for any other Student machines Record Replay Files at the Tutor Activity at the local machine can be recorded and shown to Students 1 Choose School Record Files from the Control window drop down menu 2 The Replay Files dialog will appear Existing Replay files will be listed W Replay Files a am e l gt y Create Replay File name Size Recorded Date and Time RecordedOn Converted BO History 143 580 18 07 2012 12 22 59 Local PO Local_06062012_1500_40 127 016 06 06 2012 15 00 40 Local fo Local_04072012_1111_13 157 085 336 04 07 2012 11 11 13 Local PO Local_04072012_1105_50 153 272 04 07 2012 11 05 50 Local PO Local_04072012_1105_32 164 280 04 07 2012 11 05 32 Local Replay File Location Replay files are stored in C Users Marketing Documents My Recordings Change 3 Click Change to specify where you want the Replay files stored 4 Click Create Replay to start recording The Recording icon will appear in the task bar 5 To stop recording double click the Recording icon By default filenames will be prefixed with Local and the date and time of the recording You can rename the file by over typing the default name The Replay file will appear in the list 165 NetSupport School 11 41 Watching Replay Files Stored Replay Files can be watched by Tutors and if required
195. l 2C 4 Remote Contro Tutor V Display Student User Names Keyboard Mouse Remember Student User Login names Replay Files Silent Disconnect k amp 53 Audio V Automatically Reconnect Students File Transfer Automatically save Student history on exit 4 53 User Interface Tutor Y Show Tutor Toolbar on minimizing 33 Student Tutor Assistant V Show active Print Jobs G ad Show Student alert level 3 Group Leaders CPPS Student Toolbar Show wireless and battery status Show when batteryislow Journal Show Ur __cancel Hep Display Student User Names Check this option to retrieve and display the login name of the Client on the Control window when you perform a Student Register Remember Student user login names Check this option to save the Student user login names in the Known Client list Silent Disconnect Should a Client inadvertently disconnect from the Control during a session a prompt appears at the Tutor machine Check this option to disable this warning Automatically Reconnect to Students Ensures that Student machines automatically rejoin a live remote control session should they inadvertently disconnect 310 NetSupport School 11 41 Automatically save Student history on exit Check this option to automatically save Internet Application Print Instant Messenger and Typing history to a CSV file when the Tutor is shut down Show Tutor Toolbar on minimizing When the Tu
196. l Window These Students have now been added to the Fixed list of Users ae os Note You can also choose how to connect to Students in the Tutor Configurator To modify Students in the Fixed list of Users 1 Choose School Manage Class Modify Class from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Manage Class icon in the toolbar and select Modify Class 2 The Modify Class will appear 3 Delete or add the required Student logon names to the list 4 Click OK Connect to Students via Room Mode NetSupport School provides a quick and easy method to connect to the machines in a given room An intuitive startup wizard enables you to assign PCs to a particular room and quickly deploy the student software to those machines At the start of a lesson the teacher simply indicates which of the pre defined rooms they want to connect to Roaming Students also have the option of connecting to a designated room The Room settings can also be configured at the Student in the NetSupport School Student Configurator Note Roaming Students can be configured to manually enter the room from the Student icon in the taskbar If the Student icon is hidden in the taskbar the Student can still manually enter the room by running the setroom exe This file is located in the Program folder on the Student machine 68 NetSupport School 11 41 Connecting to Students 1 N Select School Configuration from the Control wind
197. l broadcast packets on your network It is recommended that you consult your network administrator before using this feature File Distribution can be sent to Students using multicast The broadcast will only be sent to machines included in the specified IP multicast address To Distribute Files to a defined group of Clients 1 Select the appropriate tab from the Group bar in the Control window 2 Click the File Transfer icon drop down arrow on the toolbar selecting File Distribution from the list of features Or If displayed select the File Distribution icon on the toolbar 3 The File Distribution window will appear 184 NetSupport School 11 41 4 6 D All Clients File Distribution roe e File Client Folder View Window Help Cal amp amp i A el Beea amp lt S Lock Open Create Previous Settings Destination Folder Item Folder Folder Local Computer Contents of C Fiter FE E Local Computer Name i Type File Description Modified Hil Desktop Previous Folder H ae a Moin File Folder 30 03 2012 09 30 10 Sey m dell File Folder 29 03 2012 12 39 12 E Backue O L drvrtmp File Folder 20 01 2005 12 25 06 Compact Disc E Lintel File Folder 29 03 2012 12 46 52 common on uk pci group data Mi D Jane File Folder 11 04 2012 10 26 06 Versions on uk pci group data V J PerfLogs File Folder 14 07 2009 03 37 06 I marketing on 10 0 0 14 Z J Program Files File Folder 16 06 2012 10 50 40 mi
198. lanner Joumal Window Help B c c J A me anam Manage Student Random Journal Show View File Send Collect Blank Class Register Student Menu Client Transfer Work All Raia O vears a O vear 10 1 amp INvH368 2 stow E Fie al Eat 4 Unavailable History Year 2 4 Students 1 Selected 1 To switch to Whiteboard mode choose View Mode Whiteboard View from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Whiteboard icon on the left hand side of the Control window 145 NetSupport School 11 41 2 Use the range of annotation tools to highlight the screen and add any stored graphics Choose Whiteboard from the Control window drop down menu Or Select the relevant icons at the bottom of the Control window 3 If required you can save the content of the Whiteboard for later use Choose Whiteboard File Save Whiteboard Or Select the File icon at the bottom of the Control window and select Save Whiteboard To show the Whiteboard to Students 1 If showing a stored Whiteboard image select Whiteboard File Load Image from the Control window drop down menu Or Choose the File icon at the bottom of the Control window and select Load Image 2 From the Group bar select the group of Students to show the Whiteboard to 3 Choose Whiteboard Show Whiteboard from the Control window drop down menu Or Select the Show icon at the bottom of the Control window 4 The content of the Whiteboar
199. lass icon in the toolbar and select Modify Class The Modify Class dialog will appear Select the Student icon from the Student in class list Click Remove The Student is now available but is not part of the fixed list of PCs Click OK The Student icon will be removed from the Control window Note In order to reconnect to a removed Student you must browse for them and add them to the Students in class list Connect to Students using User Mode User Mode allows you to connect to a fixed list of Students by their logged on user name When connecting to Students using User Mode the Students will become part of the Fixed list of Users The Fixed list of Users is a list of available Students that have been found on the network These details are stored in the Client NSS file 1 2 3 In the Class Wizard click New Click User Mode The Create Class dialog will appear Create Class z ICT Cancel Description Help List of Student logins one per line NSC_Brow NSC Neal Make this the active connection method 67 NetSupport School 11 41 Specify a name and description for the class Enter the Student logon names one per line To make this the active connection method select Make this the active connection method Click OK The new class will appear in the Class Wizard Click OK The Tutor will browse for and connect to the Students and display their icons in the Contro
200. le name server 283 for subnet browsing 75 protect configuration 287 set connectivity 283 set Control name 287 set password 287 set transport 283 to show across wireless networks 283 Tutor profiles 252 292 configure the student toolbar 261 configuring netsupport school on google chrome 83 configuring the tutor assistant 80 connect to students browse mode 65 pc mode 66 room mode 68 user mode 67 connect to students using browse mode 65 connect to students using pc mode 66 connect to students using user mode 67 connecting to Clients at installation 43 configuring subnets 75 join class 70 name server gateway 91 372 terminal server 79 connecting to students at startup 62 connecting to students via room mode 68 connectivity 266 283 console See testing console Control announcement make a 154 audio support 154 blanking Client screens 105 chat to Clients 171 clipboard 113 configure 279 create class 70 ctrit alt delete 111 executing applications at Clients 191 file distribution 183 file transfer 180 help requests dealing with 178 lock Client mouse and keyboard 105 logoff Clients 197 make Client a group leader 100 messages sending 175 profiles 292 protect configuration 290 remote control 108 scan Clients 115 showing the Control screen 135 starting 43 user defined tools 195 using replay files 161 using show leaders 140 video support 157 viewing Clients 108 Co
201. led by default but can be removed by un checking the appropriate box Settings for Configuration NetSupport School 4 Remote Control 2 View 3 Keyboard Mouse 33 Replay Files 33 Audio v Enable Group Leaders v Show visual Group Leader connections Select the functions a group leader can perform within their group Functions V Show File Transfer 4 t User Interface Ei Scan v Message 3 Tutor I Chat Nib Student F Execute Tutor Assistant Z Send Collect Work LT Group Leaders Z Audio Show Announce and View Student Toolbar E Joumal D Journal Viewing modes show E Share V Control v Watch OK l Cancel l Help 101 NetSupport School 11 41 Assigning a Group Leader 1 Select the required group from the Group bar 2 Select the required Client icon 3 Choose Student Group Leader from the Control window drop down menu Or Right click the required Client and select Group Leader The Client icon in the Control window will be highlighted to indicate that they are a Group Leader A connection bar showing the link from the Group Leader to the Students can also be displayed choose View Current Settings Group Leaders from the Control window drop down menu and enable Show Visual Group Leader Connections Different groups will have different colour connection bars these will be displayed in other views when in Large icons layout
202. lication and click OK to add to the approved or restricted list Remove an application from your Approved or Restricted List 1 To remove an application from the List simply highlight the chosen application and click x Or Right click in the list boxes and select Remove Application Note The default Application List is NetSupport School app Apply Approved or Restricted Applications Restrictions can be applied to individual Students or all connected Students Students can view the current restrictions in the Student Toolbar 1 If you want to apply restrictions to individual Students select their icons in the List view 2 To apply these restrictions choose Applications Allow Approved Applications Only or Block Restricted Applications Or Click the Approved or Restricted icon at the bottom of the Control window 222 NetSupport School 11 41 To acknowledge which restriction has been activated an appropriate indicator will appear next to the Student icons When viewing Large icons only Red for restricted green for approved If a Student is currently running an application included in your activated restriction list an Application Blocked dialog will appear on their screen stating the application that has been blocked by the Tutor This will also appear if a Student attempts to run any of the applications included on the restriction list End Approved or Restricted Applications 1
203. lient and group icons can be changed by amending the properties of the selected item Choose Client Properties Details tab or Group Properties from the Control window drop down menu Select Customise in the Appearance section 104 NetSupport School 11 41 USING NETSUPPORT SCHOOL In this chapter You will discover how to use the wealth of features available to a Control User From how to initiate a remote control session to how you then monitor and manage activity at the end users desktop 105 NetSupport School 11 41 Locking Student Controls and Blanking Student Screens When you perform a Show the Students mice and keyboards are automatically locked There may however be other occasions when you want to lock Students keyboards and mice You can only Lock Unlock Students that are connected The keyboard and mouse can be configured to lock separately if required From the Control window drop down menu choose View Current Settings User Interface Student To Lock Students 1 Select the Student s or Groups of Students you wish to Lock 2 From the Control window drop down menu choose Student Lock Keyboard Mouse Or From the toolbar choose Lock Or Right click the selected Student icons and choose Lock keyboard Mouse 3 By default a graphic will appear on the Student workstation informing them that you have locked their mouse and keyboard To Unlock Students 1 From the Control
204. lient icon and select Group Leader Or Choose Student Group Leader from the Control window drop down menu The Client will receive a message informing them that Group Leader rights have been removed 103 NetSupport School 11 41 Customise Client and Group Icons The Student and group icons displayed in the Control window can be customised to suit individual requirements A choice of images can be used and you can apply these to the machine name or to the logged on user Customise Client and or group icons 1 Select Student Customize or Group Customize from the Control window drop down menu 2 The Image Customisation dialog will appear Select one of the three tabs All Computers Applies the selected image to the machine name Logged On User Name Assigns the image to the user name so will load at whatever PC the Student logs onto This option takes precedence over the machine name Groups Enables you to apply an image to each defined group of Students 3 Select the Client name or group from the list and click Modify If using the Logged on user name option click Add and enter the Students logon name 4 Browse for the required icon image A number of default libraries ncl are provided in the Program Folder or you can select a picture of your own choosing Highlight the required image and click OK Repeat this process for any other Clients and groups 5 Click OK when complete Note Individual C
205. llowing books EEEIEE wrote Macbeth Huckleberry Finn was written by IRENE wrote Frankenstien Rob Roy was written by Enter the A for the question along with up to four statements Within each statement highlight with your mouse the word or phrase that you want the Student to drag and drop Click Set Answer when you are happy that you have selected the appropriate text canca Help Once you have completed part one of the wizard click Next 339 NetSupport School 11 41 Drag and Drop Image The Student is presented with up to four statements or questions and a selection of images They must match the image with the correct statement The first stage of three is to enter the instructions along with up to four statements or phrases Alongside each statement you add the appropriate image Click Browse to search for the images The list of pictures currently stored in the Images database will appear Either select an existing image or Import a new one Click Use to apply the image to the question When the question is run at Student machines the pictures are randomly arranged at the bottom of the screen and the Students drag and drop the images next to the appropriate statement Drag amp Drop exes Instructions Match the Country to the flag Option 1 Brazil 7 Browse Option 2 Morocco a Browse Option 3 Canada a bel ae Browse a Option 4 Egypt a 98
206. m Enter a Title and Description for the exam Choose whether to have the exam timed if so set the time limit hh mm You can use your own grading system by selecting from the Grading Schema drop down Decide whether to use the default scoring system you can assign your own scores to questions in stage two You can then add some optional information such as the age range or class group that the exam is aimed at Click Next when ready Note If you wish to use a Grading Schema you must first create one in the Exam Grades dialog 355 3 5 NetSupport School 11 41 Stage two is to select the questions for the exam Expand the tree in the left hand pane of the window and highlight the required question click the Add Question button The tree view can be sorted by Author Level Question Type and Subject Repeat this process until all questions are selected ns Lx Sort by Subject m General Level Type Score Question Title m Geography Hard Combo List 4 Choose the correct di 5 9 History Easy Drag amp Drop Text 3 Complete the followin Dates Multi Choice Listen to the music ar Choose the correct year that these c Multi Choice ma Name the aeroplane H Science Order tems Using the picture to h LLL 2z lols le 4 m r 100 mark is equal to 13 points 7 DD Information This exam has 5 question s in a time limit of 01 00 that is 00 12 00 per question sie C oe Selected
207. mage to the view that you wish to see Or select a section of the image by dragging a box over that area Use the scroll bars to position the image within the viewable area To select the required section use your mouse to draw around the area you require When ready press Enter or click Next to continue Use this preview window to position the answers on the image select the type of arrow you wish to use and choose an appropriate colour scheme for the pointer lines and background Drag amp Drop Labels on to image ag Label line colour Arrow Type oe Move the answers to a location that does not cover an important section of the image Then move the pointer of each answer to the correct location on the image lt Bak J net gt J Coce Hep 343 NetSupport School 11 41 Drag the end of each pointer to the correct region of the image Drag the associated text box to an appropriate area Select the pointer style you wish to use and choose a colour for the pointers and background Click Next when ready 344 NetSupport School 11 41 True or False Students are provided with a statement and they must decide whether it is true or false The first stage of three is to provide instructions for the question then enter the statement you want the students to answer and specify whether the statement is true or false True or false Wiz A Instructions Select if the foll
208. mary dialog will appear Click Properties to enter the details for the deployment Click Browse to specify the folder containing the Client Configuration file that is to be deployed The default configuration file is CLIENT32 INI and is stored in the NetSupport School installation directory Click Edit to access the Client Configurator in order to make changes to the Configuration file For the new settings to take effect immediately by default the Client Service will be automatically restarted after the deployment If not required uncheck the Restart the NetSupport School Client service box Click OK to return to the Summary dialog You can view the contents of the configuration file by clicking on the file name Click Deploy A progress dialog will appear enabling you to monitor the status of the deployment 10 Click Close when complete 35 NetSupport School 11 41 Deploy a NetSupport School Licence file When installing a NetSupport School package a licence file is sent to each workstation However there may be occasions when the licence information needs updating For example you have purchased additional licenses and the licence file needs updating to reflect this By using NetSupport School Deploy you can remotely update the file on user workstations 1 Select the required workstations 2 Choose Deploy NetSupport School Licence file from the Deploy Main window drop down menu Or Right click the selected work
209. mpleted all four tabs click OK to return to the Deploy Summary dialog You can review your selections and edit if required Click Deploy to commence the uninstall A progress dialog will appear enabling you to monitor the deployment as it uninstalls each workstation Click Close when complete NetSupport School 11 41 Pre Define Settings For A Future Deployment There may be occasions when you want to defer a deployment until a more convenient time of the day With NetSupport School Deploy you can prepare the settings in advance and choose when to perform the deployment Note You select the workstations to deploy to when you are ready to run the deployment To Prepare The Settings For A Future Deployment 1 Choose Deploy Configuration from the Deploy Main window drop down menu 2 The Deploy List dialog will appear Select the required Deploy option Package Client Configuration Licence File or Uninstall 3 Click Properties and enter the required settings 4 When all settings are entered click Close to return to the Deploy Main window To Run The Deployment 1 Select the workstations to Deploy to See Preparing a Deployment 2 Choose Deploy from the Main window drop down menu Or Right click the selected workstations and choose Deploy 3 Select the required Deploy option The Deploy Summary dialog will appear showing your pre defined selections You can edit these if required 5 Click Deploy t
210. n Enter the first few characters of the Student names that you want to connect to For example entering Classi would connect to all workstations whose Student name started with Class1 e g Class1_Wk1 Classi_Wk2 etc This can be left blank to search for all Students To make this the active connection method select Make this the active connection method Click OK The new class will appear in the Class Wizard Click OK The Tutor will browse for and connect to all Students found and display their icons in the Control Window Notes If a workstation was not available at the time the Tutor initialised you can subsequently connect to it by clicking the Manage Class icon in the toolbar and then clicking Refresh This will re search the network and connect any additional Clients meeting the criteria If required a message can be displayed at the Student workstation when a connection is made See the Configuring The Student section of this manual A warning icon will highlight machines you have been unable to connect to Mouse over the icon to display the reason why the connection failed 65 NetSupport School 11 41 Connect to Students using PC Mode PC Mode allows you to connect to a fixed list of Student computers by machine name When connecting to Students using PC Mode the Students will become part of the Fixed list of PCs The Fixed list of PCs is a list of available Students that have been found on the network
211. n you have exited from the NetSupport School program e The default Word list is saved as NetSupport School wdl 131 NetSupport School 11 41 View Typing History This feature of Keyboard Monitoring enables you to monitor the Keyboard usage of connected Students and if required store or print a permanent record 1 In Typing View choose Typing History from the Control window drop down menu 2 The Typing History dialog will appear This provides details of the Students Keyboard activity during the currently connected session La Fl Typing History cenza Show History for Selected Client s All Clients Student Name Login Name Computer Name Application Started Typing 8 Andy pcijle INVH288 Jane lt eapjane hotmail com gt 01 18 12 14 42 03 E What answer did you put for 8 Andy peijle INVH288 Jane lt eampjane hotmail com gt 01 18 12 14 38 51 Can you tell what you wrote for 8 Lisa testing INVH142 Document1 Microsoft Word 01 18 12 14 34 54 Batlle of Hastings The Saxons 2 Eddie testing XP SP3 football results Google Search Google Chrome 01 18 12 14 30 52 footn ba Il resultslast night tv a Jane peijle INVH368 Jane lt j earp netsupportsoftware com gt 01 18 12 14 27 27 Do you want to meet for lt m n n Gol eel e toe The available options are Show History for The list can be viewed by currently Selected Client or All Connected Clients Refresh While viewing the list cli
212. n be changed by choosing Group Customise or Group Properties from the Control window drop down menu To enable disable the Group bar choose View Toolbar Group bar The List View The List view displays the currently connected Clients or Groups You can switch the display mode between large and small icons lists and detailed view from the drop down View menu When you mouse over a Client icon a thumbnail of the Student machine is displayed Client properties such as the displayed name and icon image can be changed by selecting Student Customise or Student Properties from the Control window drop down menu The wireless status and battery power level can be displayed next to the Student icon when in thumbnail mode or list view You can choose which indicators to display in the Tutor User Interface settings Note Student names can also be customised using the Student Register function 47 NetSupport School 11 41 The List view can be viewed in the following modes 48 DESEeeOReaae Normal View Monitor Mode Audio View Q amp A View Web View Application View Survey View Print View IM View Device View Typing View Whiteboard View NetSupport School 11 41 Click the individual icons on the left hand side of the Control window or choose View Normal Monitor Audio Q amp A Web Application Survey Print IM Device Typing Whiteboard view from the Control window drop do
213. n by increasing the score value Question Type Question Summary Summary of Question Default Score g Description Using the picture to help you order the planet Type Combo List 4 Level Easy Score value seve Cancel Heb 3 Increase the score by using the appropriate buttons Note Questions with multiple answers can only be incremented by a corresponding number 4 When you have finished click Save to exit 357 NetSupport School 11 41 Preview Exam You can preview an exam at any time in order to simulate what the Students will see This is a useful way of checking each question and viewing the resources pictures video s etc that may have been included Although the exam runs exactly how it would at the Student workstations the preview facility does not return any results 1 Select the exam in the Tree view Choose Exams Preview Exam from the Designers drop down menu click the Preview Exam icon or right click the exam name and select Preview 3 Use the buttons at the bottom of the window to move between questions and end the preview You can also click each question number on the left hand side of the window to view each one Note Individual questions can also be previewed in this mode Expand the tree beneath an exam to reveal the questions highlight the appropriate item and click Preview Edit Exam 1 Select the exam in the Tree view 2 Choose Exams Edit Exam from the D
214. n more than one Student has been selected This can be done automatically by selecting the Allow question bounce option or manually by selecting Q amp A Bounce Question from the Control window drop down menu or clicking the Bounce icon at the bottom of the Control window If a Student has answered correctly you can allow them to select the next random Student Note If a Student has answered they will not be randomly selected again during this session You can also select a Student randomly by selecting Student Select Random Student from the Control window drop down menu 236 NetSupport School 11 41 Question and Answer Module Tutor Interface Once the question type has been selected and the options chosen Student thumbnails will be displayed in the Tutor The thumbnails allow you to see who has responded and mark their answers more easily Customise Thumbnail Size Student thumbnails can be resized to suit personal preferences 1 Choose Q amp A Size from the Control window drop down menu 2 Select the required size from the available options Or 1 Use the slider on the Size icon at the bottom of the Control window to select the required size Auto Fit Size of Student Thumbnail This option will automatically adjust the size of the displayed thumbnails to fit the window 1 Click the Auto icon at the bottom of the Control window The following icons can be displayed at the Tutor Student has not ye
215. n the Tutor program is minimised 264 NetSupport School 11 41 Student Rewards NetSupport School provides the Tutor with the ability to Reward Students for good behaviour During a lesson a Tutor can give individual Students a Reward in the form of a Star which is reflected on the main toolbar The number of Rewards a Student has can be viewed by mousing over the Student icon in Normal view Note The Student Toolbar must be switched on to use this feature Giving Rewards to Students 1 2 3 Select the required Student in the List view Choose Student Rewards Give a Reward from the Control window drop down menu Or Right Click an individual Student and choose Reward Give a Reward A star will appear on the Student Toolbar Removing Rewards 1 2 3 Select the required Student in the List view Choose Student Rewards Remove a Reward from the Control window drop down menu Or Right Click an individual Student and choose Reward Remove a Reward A star will be removed from the Student Toolbar Note All Rewards can be removed from a Student by selecting Student Rewards Remove all Rewards from the Control window drop down menu 265 NetSupport School 11 41 CONFIGURING THE STUDENT WORKSTATION NetSupport School Clients are configured using the NetSupport School Student Configurator from the NetSupport School Program Group The Student Configurator has eigh
216. n toggle between this state and the filenames only state by using the list style buttons in the File Transfer User Interface 307 NetSupport School 11 41 Show file names only Select this option to only display filenames in the file lists This allows you to display more files at the same time than with file details You can toggle between this state and the Details state by using the list style buttons in the File Transfer User Interface Confirm When you perform potentially dangerous file operations such as deleting a folder or file you can make the Control display a Confirmation dialog box This helps prevent accidental loss of data If you are familiar with the User Interface you can turn these options off as required By default all the confirmation settings are turned on Folder copy Make the user confirm before copying a folder structure Folder delete Make the user confirm before deleting a folder structure File overwrite If checked displays a confirmation dialog before overwriting an existing file However if unchecked the confirmation message will still appear if system hidden files are about to be overwritten File delete Display a confirmation dialog before deleting one or more files Use Recycle Bin for local deletions when available All files deleted from the Local pane will be sent to the Recycle bin this is enabled by default Use Compression Check this box to enable the use of compression When yo
217. nd the most efficient method for capturing screen data is to hook into the Video Driver of the workstation being viewed However there may be occasions when this method will not work because certain applications bypass the driver In these circumstances you can enable screen scrape mode in order to take a snapshot of the screen Although this will have a greater impact on the network it will at least provide an accurate representation of the Client s screen 275 NetSupport School 11 41 Performance Cache size Screen data that has been recently sent to the Control by the Client is cached to improve performance A larger cache improves performance at the expense of using more memory at both the Client and the Control Setting this option enables you to tailor the cache size in order to achieve maximum performance The Client and the Control use the same size cache the lowest cache value will be used so you must ensure that you set this at both the Client and the Control for this to be effective Image Option Image File When a Client s keyboard and mouse have been locked a default image nss_lock_image jpg appears on their screen Alternatively you may prefer to specify an image personal to your organisation Note If you do not want to display an image you can choose to blank the Student s screen when locked instead Select View Current Settings User Interface Student from the Control window drop down menu an
218. ndividual Student Summary By selecting the Student name in the Tree view you can display a full breakdown of the individual results This is ideal for highlighting any problem areas that the Student may have If you have applied a Grading Schema the marked grade along with any comments you added would also be displayed An index itemising the points scored for each question is provided from which you can jump to each question to see how the Student answered 366 NetSupport School 11 41 The toolbar provides shortcuts to a number of additional features Show Results This enables you to show each Student their results and if required include the answers To display to all Students simultaneously highlight Students Reports in the tree to show to an individual Student select their name The Test Player will re open at the Student workstations enabling them to view each question in turn The window will indicate which questions they got right wrong or in the case of questions that have multiple answers partially correct If you have chosen to include the answers a Show Answers button will appear on the Test Player window enabling the Student to toggle between their response and the correct answers Show Report This option enables you to display the individual summary reports at Student workstations Print Report Enables the Tutor to obtain a printed copy of the Class and Student summaries Highlight the required item in the T
219. nect Prompt 1 Select View Current Settings User Interface Tutor from the Control window drop down menu 2 Select the Silent Disconnect option and Click OK The next time a Student disconnects no message will be displayed Note To automatically reconnect to Students when they become available ensure that the Automatically Reconnect to Students option is selected in the Tutor User Interface Settings 74 NetSupport School 11 41 Configuring NetSupport School For Subnet Browsing If your network is running across multiple TCP IP Subnets you need to configure NetSupport School to use the additional subnets when browsing for Clients Before configuring NetSupport School to browse on a remote IP subnet it is useful to understand how IP addresses are made up and in particular what an IP Broadcast Address is See Understanding IP Addresses To Configure the NetSupport School Control to browse IP subnets 1 Select School Configuration from the Control window drop down menu 2 From the Configuration options choose Network and Wireless Settings Click the Settings button under Browsing The Configure TCP IP Client Browsing dialog will appear 5 Click Add and enter the Broadcast Address of the network you wish to browse if known Po Enter IP Browse Address ra Cancel Advanced gt gt Or To enable NetSupport School to calculate the Broadcast Address click Advanced and enter a Tar
220. needed to view the Student thumbnails Changing the Thumbnail Refresh Rate Depending on how closely you want to monitor Student activity you can adjust the frequency at which the thumbnails are refreshed 1 Choose Monitor Update from the Control window drop down menu 2 Select the required time interval from the available options 122 NetSupport School 11 41 Show Active Application When enabled an icon will appear in the top right of each thumbnail indicating which application is currently active at the Student machine In addition if you have created approved and restricted application lists a green approved or red restricted border will appear on the thumbnail alerting you to any potential misuse of applications 1 Choose Monitor Show Active Application from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Show Active Application icon at the bottom of the Control window Show Active Web Site Displays an icon in the bottom right of each thumbnail indicating which site the Student is currently visiting If you have created approved and restricted web lists a green approved or red restricted border will appear on the thumbnail alerting you to any potential misuse of the Internet 1 Choose Monitor Show Active Web Site from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Show Active Web Site icon at the bottom of the Control window Show Help Requests If enabled this option highlights when
221. ng Classroom If you need to deploy the Student software across your network or need more advanced options click Network To just start the Tutor program click Start and the Class Wizard will appear The Class Wizard enables you to enter the general properties of a new lesson and allows you to choose how to locate and connect to your Students You can create multiple classes using different connection methods The required class can then be loaded at the start of the lesson and you can quickly connect to Student machines 43 NetSupport School 11 41 As the Tutor program loads NetSupport School will then browse the network for the specified Students While it is searching the browsing message will be displayed A warning icon will highlight machines you have been unable to connect to Mouse over the icon to display the reason why the connection failed All connected Students will have their icons displayed in the Control window Note If you have selected the Chrome students only or Tablet students only licence types during installation the NetSupport School Tutor Console will reflect the features available for these Students You can enter or alter the lesson details for the current class in Normal view This pane can be minimised by clicking the button Note To prevent the Tech Console from automatically connecting to the Tutor workstation ensure the NetSupport School Client is installed and set the Enable User A
222. nses Students choose the appropriate response and submit the answer siny Student zi as Question What year was the battle of Hastings Answer P aes P 1295 P 1994 P 1066 P 1067 As Students submit their answers the Survey Results pane will display the percentage response for each option The Client icon will also flag how the individual Student answered By choosing View Details from the Control window drop menu you can sort the Students by result Alternatively you can sort the Students into temporary groups by response Choose Survey Auto Group Students from the Control window drop down menu When the survey is complete remove it from the screen by choosing Survey Cancel Survey from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Cancel icon displayed at the bottom of the Survey pane Note The Survey will be cleared from all machines whether the Student has responded or not 228 NetSupport School 11 41 Show Survey Results to Students 1 Choose Survey Show Results to Students from the Control window drop down list Or Click the Show icon at the bottom of the Control window 2 The results will be displayed as a pie chart on the Students screen Note Survey results will only be displayed if the Student Toolbar is running and the Student has submitted their answer Save Survey Results The Survey can be saved to a CSV file 1 Choose Survey Save Results
223. nt Survey pane enter the question and choose the required responses from the drop down list or add new options if the defaults aren t appropriate 2 Send the Survey to Students The Survey will automatically be stored in the current list Or Rather than send the Survey immediately choose Survey Add Survey to List from the Control window drop down menu or click the Add icon displayed at the bottom of the Survey pane to store the question and responses for future use 230 NetSupport School 11 41 To Use an Existing Survey 1 In the Student Survey pane click the Select Add Question icon Green cross The Select Survey dialog will appear Select Survey _ EEE Question Response Did you enjoy the presentation Yes No Dont Know Cancel Which section of the test was most difficult ABCD E ccs e Add new Survey to the list Question Response 2 Select a question from the list and click OK 3 The question will be displayed in the Survey pane ready to be sent to Students 231 NetSupport School 11 41 Manage Questions and Responses As well as enabling you to choose an existing Survey the Select Survey dialog can be used to add new questions responses and edit questions responses if the current examples are not appropriate 1 If the Survey list does not currently include the required question enter the new question along with the responses in the boxes provided and click
224. nt meets the conditions that define a secure PC a green shield is displayed in Report mode this will turn red if the Client fails to meet even one of these conditions Define a Secure PC Define what options determine whether a PC is classed as secure 1 Select Security Define Secure PC from the drop down menu 2 The Define Secure PC dialog will appear l Define Secure PC x Check the options which should be used to determine if a PC is secure J Options Firewall 7 On Anti Virus V Active Anti Spyware V Active UAC 7 On Windows Updates F Notify Only V Download and Notfiy 7 Automatic IE Phishing Filter 7 On IE Protected Mode On Help Cancel 3 Select the required options View Current Security Settings In Report mode the current security status for Clients is displayed under the Security column Hovering over the shield will display the current status of all items for a Client 1 Right click the Client icon and choose Properties 2 The Client Properties dialog will appear select the Security tab 329 NetSupport School 11 41 Change the Security Settings Select the Client icon 1 330 Choose Security Modify Security Settings from the drop down menu Or Click the Modify icon on the toolbar Or Right click the shield in Report mode and select Modify Security Settings The Modify Settings dialog will appear Alter the settings as required Right click the Client icon and
225. ntrol Window 45 bitmap backgrounds 58 customise Client names 52 customise list view 57 customise toolbar 46 conventions used 12 converting replay files to video files 169 create exam 353 create group leader 100 create pre set messages 176 NetSupport School 11 41 create questions 334 create test designer users 358 creating an administrative installation 23 ctri alt delete 111 customisable text 269 customise Client amp group icons 103 Control window toolbar 46 cut and paste remotely 113 define a secure pc 327 delete exam 357 delete group leader 102 delete questions subjects topics 350 deleting files and folders 182 deploy a Client configuration 35 a NetSupport School licence file 36 a NetSupport School package 30 getting started 28 log files 40 pre define settings 39 Remote Install 26 remote uninstall 37 room mode 41 designer adding resources to questions 346 create combo list question 339 create drag amp drop image question 338 create exam 353 create label image question 340 create multi choice question 336 create multi true or false question 344 create order items question 345 create questions 334 create true or false question 343 delete exam 357 delete questions 350 drag amp drop text question 337 edit exam 356 exam mode 352 import export data 360 observation mode 347 preview exam 356 publish exam 357 question scores 355 questions mode 333 setting
226. ntrol window drop down menu Or Click the Application Control icon on the left hand side of the Control window Group View Applications Layout Planner Journal Window Help Po e 2 RS a M 2 0 8 mA Curent Application Running Applications vss Mamol Moot ed C RFiFOReee gt TV Guide UK TV Listings UK s No 1 TV Lining ste DE Aow an SEJ Approved Ony G Block Restricted In Applications Mode you can view details of Approved or Restricted Applications and use the available icons to Allow All Revert back to unrestricted access if application restrictions have been in place A Approved Only Activate the Approved Applications list The Student will only be able to run applications that are in the approved list All other applications are blocked 216 NetSupport School 11 41 Block Restricted Activate the Restricted Applications list The Student will not be able to run applications that are in the restricted list but will be able to run all other applications Note A padlock will be displayed next to the Application Control view icon when there are global policy restrictions in force You can override the restrictions in the Tutor configuration The Application Control Module can be used to perform the following functions Identify applications currently running on the Student workstation In the List View the student icons can be viewed in two diff
227. nts will drag and drop each item to the correct place Put these oceans in order of size Largest to Smallest Text 3 Indian A T4 ae 9 Enter the instructions for the question along with up to four items to order Once you have completed part one of the wizard click Next 347 NetSupport School 11 41 Adding Additional Resources to Questions The Resources Database Imagery in the form of pictures videos and sound clips are often an integral part of any question you create Question types such as Label Image and Drag and Drop Image are graphical by nature but any question type can have an additional supporting resource included The Designer provides an Observation mode which if enabled forces Students to view or listen to a resource before they can answer the question Before you can attach a resource to a question it must first be added to the programs internal Resources database By default this is stored in program files netsupport netsupport school resources but the location can be modified by selecting File Options from the drop down menu To populate the database click the Resources icon on the Designers main toolbar or select File Resources from the drop down menu The Resource List will appear A range of toolbar options are available enabling you to import and manage items Prior to importing a new resource click the Filter icon and select the relevant category Audio Image
228. o be sent This can affect screen update performance on slower workstations To Access the Volume Controls 1 Right click the Speaker icon in the task bar To change other options such as sound quality do one of the following Global Method Changes default setting for all Clients 1 Choose View Current Settings Audio from the Control window drop down menu Individual Client Method During a Show or View 1 While Viewing the Client 2 Choose View Settings for Client Audio from the View window drop down menu 3 The Audio Setting dialog will be displayed This allows you to set the following properties Volume Settings Adjustments Threshold Microphone sensitivity Microphone Volume of microphone Speaker Volume of speakers Enable Options On Turn Audio on Off Turn Audio off Talk Set the Control Audio to Talk function only Listen Set the Control Audio to Listen function only 157 NetSupport School 11 41 NetSupport School Video Player NetSupport School provides exceptional multimedia support with full Audio Video and remote control capabilities While the Video Player can be used to run a video file on the local workstation NetSupport School s remote control capabilities combined with full Audio Support enable you to use this tool to enhance training sessions and demonstrations across multiple PCs simultaneously All standard video files for example avi and mpg are supported The Video Playe
229. o start the deployment 39 NetSupport School 11 41 Log Files When using NetSupport School Deploy information about each deployment whether a package install licence update configuration download or uninstall is recorded This provides a useful reminder each time you use the utility of what you have previously deployed The information is stored in a Log File To view Log Files 1 From the NetSupport School Deploy main window select the Log Files tab E NetSupport School Deploy oes File Log View Help Mon Jun 25 14 55 57 TEST30 Checking Client Version Winetwork LouFiles Asecunty Menin 25 145857 Checking TEST30 Client version 55 Log Files Mon Jun 25 14 55 57 NSS V11 00i17 detected amp NetSupport School Mon Jun 25 14 55 57 TEST30 Retrieving platform information m Seep ROaeoe Mon Jun 25 14 55 57 Retrieving platform information for TEST30 S E Mon Jun 25 15 29 53 2012 Mon Jun 25 14 56 05 TEST30 running Windows 2000 i 55 Mon Jun 25 14 56 05 Copying NetSupport School to TEST30 ri tenan 25 14 55 57 2012 eee E Deploy Log Mon Jun 25 14 56 06 TEST30 Copying NetSupport School files to machine H Deployed To Mon Jun 25 14 56 13 Mon Jun 25 14 56 13 Installation started on TEST30 Mon Jun 25 14 56 13 Mon Jun 25 14 56 13 Mon Jun 25 14 56 13 NetSupport School sent to 1 machines _ 2 Inthe left hand pane of the Main window increase or decrease the Tree view to see a description of e
230. od for performing a set installation at several machines To perform a Silent Install 1 Create a distribution copy of NetSupport School containing the required NetSupport School Installation files To determine the properties for the Installation at the command line run INSTCFG EXE S from the NetSupport School program folder The Install Configuration Options dialog will appear The selected properties are stored in a parameter file default name NSS ini Choose File Save and save the NSS ini file to the folder containing the distribution copy of NetSupport School To perform the Silent Install at the required workstation from the folder containing the distribution copy run msiexec i NetSupport School msi qn MSI installer setup S v qn setup exe installer Note NetSupport School can be installed via Active Directory The software installation group policy object GPO must be applied to organisational units OUs containing computer accounts rather than users Please note that for software installation to take effect immediately it is necessary to enable the Always wait for the network at computer startup and logon parameter in the Computer Configuration Administrative Templates System Logon leaf of the group policy controlling the computers that are subject to software installation This change will affect login times for Windows XP machines that have this applied Without this change an additional l
231. of specific URLs In addition the Tutor can temporarily suspend all Internet access Note Supported Internet Browsers for Internet metering and restrictions are IE 5 5 or higher Firefox 2 or higher and Google Chrome The following Browsers only support Internet restrictions Apple Safari 5 0 Opera 9 and higher 1 Choose View Mode Web View from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Web Control icon on the left hand side of the Control window K NetSupport School MARKETINGOL School Student Group View Web Layout Planner Journal Window Help 5 a F jurnal Show View File Send Collect Lock Blank Web Co Browse Manage ommunicate Help Student Student Quick Testin Transfer Work ccess Consol ti 2 www youtube com fof urenaes o sooreves ony Ie E Jo soar Unavailable History Year 2 4 Students 1 Selected Alisa ji Tutor Assistant e In Web Mode you can view details of Approved or Restricted Websites and use the available icons to 199 Unrestricted Approved Only l Gi Block Restricted Restrict All Safe Search il Ca Block FTP NetSupport School 11 41 Revert back to unrestricted access if restrictions have been in place Activate the Approved Site List The Student will only be able to view url s that are in the approved list All other url s are blocked When the Student accesses the Internet they are
232. of each Client s View window Note Scale to Fit is set by default To View the screen in normal resolution turn off Scale to Fit 112 NetSupport School 11 41 Blank All Client Screens Although you can blank a Client screen while it is being Viewed there may be occasions when you quickly want to blank all Client screens simultaneously To Blank All Client Screens 1 Choose School Blank Screen from the Control window drop down menu 2 The Lock symbol will appear on each Client icon 3 To restore the screens repeat the above process 113 NetSupport School 11 41 Remote Clipboard During a View Session you can copy the content of the clipboard between Control and Client PCs The Clipboard icon available on the View window toolbar provides the following options Send Clipboard Used when copying from the Control to a Client and using the Edit Cut Copy menu option Retrieve Clipboard Used when copying from the Client to the Control and using the Edit Cut Copy menu option Auto When enabled provides the quickest method for copying data Use the short cut keys Ctrl C amp Ctrl V to automatically copy to and from the clipboard at both the Control and Client machines Sending the content of the clipboard from a Control to a Client workstation 1 View the required Client 2 Open appropriate applications on the Client and Control workstations Select and copy the required data from the applic
233. og off log on cycle is required to effect installation 24 NetSupport School 11 41 Install Configuration Options Dialog When performing a silent installation or using NetSupport School Deploy you can customise the installation to suit individual requirements This dialog accessed by running INSTCFG EXE S from the NetSupport School program folder if performing a silent installation or if using NetSupport School Deploy via the Install Properties General tab enables you to specify the variables for the installation The information is stored in a parameter file default name NSS ini a Install Configuration Options Untitled File Help M Student r M Tutor I Add desktop shortcut for Tutor control V Remote Deployment Utility V Tech Console includes Remote Deployment V Add desktop shortcut for Tech Console 7 Name and Connectivity Server I Standalone Test Designer Install Directory Leave blank for default OK Cancel Help Icons Select the relevant check boxes to indicate which NetSupport School components will be installed on the Client machines General Install Directory Specify the directory where NetSupport School will be installed Leave blank to install in the default directory Program Files NetSupport NetSupport School 25 NetSupport School 11 41 NetSupport School Deploy NetSupport School s Remote Install Utility The NetSupport School Deploy Utilit
234. ol Configuration Student Selection from the Control window drop down menu The connection methods available are e Room Mode Connect to Student computers by Room s e PC Mode Connect to a fixed list of Student computers by machine name e User Mode Connect to a fixed list of Students by logged on user name e Browse Mode Browse the network and connect to Student computers with a specific machine name e Publish Class Create a class and enable Students to connect to it Note Publish Class is only available for selection in the Tutor Configuration The default method is Room Mode Notes e Ifthe expected Students are not found it may be because NetSupport School has not been configured to browse the required Networks See Configuring NetSupport School For Subnet Browsing for more information e If a Name Server Gateway has been configured the Tutor program will use the details registered here rather than perform a browse across the network e It is essential that you have a logical naming convention for the Student workstations If you need to change the names of any Student workstations see Configuring the Student workstations 62 NetSupport School 11 41 Class Wizard The Class Wizard enables you to enter the general properties of a new lesson and allows you to choose how to locate and connect to your Students You can create multiple classes using different connection methods The requir
235. ol 11 41 Note Although internally the Control connects to Clients by referring to their Client name the user at the Control can configure the Control program to display a different name While Viewed Silent Mode Allows the Control to connect and View a Client without the Clients knowledge If Silent Mode is not selected the Clients screen and mouse icon will flicker notifying the Client that a connection has been made and their screen is being Viewed Send Physical Fonts When a Windows Client is sending its screen to a Control it passes the font information by reference to reduce the volume of data sent The Control refers to its own internal font mappings and uses the closest matching that it has to the one being displayed at the Client In most cases the same fonts will be available at both the Client and the Control and so what is displayed on the screen will appear identical However there may be occasions when a close match cannot be found In these cases it is desirable that the Client sends the Control the full information that it requires to display the data in the same font Setting this option forces TrueType text to be sent as glyphs i e character shapes rather than character codes This guarantees that they will be displayed correctly at the Control This will however impact on performance especially on Dial up lines and is not usually required Enable Screen Scrape NetSupport School s favoured a
236. ol 11 41 The Exam Interface Having created a library of questions you can then add them to an exam Your own Grading and Scoring schemes can be applied and Exams can be centrally published for shared use with other teachers The icons available in Exam Mode enable you to e Create Exams e Edit the content of an exam e Delete an Exam e Publish an Exam Before an exam can be run at Student PCs it needs to be published This also enables you to store completed exams in a shared area for general use e Preview an Exam Enables you to step through the questions as the Students will see them e Edit Exam Grades Apply your own Grading scheme to exams 353 NetSupport School 11 41 Exam Grades Upon completion of an exam teachers are provided with a detailed breakdown of results You can further enhance this report by categorising the students within specific bands The Exam Grades need to be set up before you start creating an exam Select Exams Exam Grades from the Designers drop down menu or click the Exam Grades icon Please enter the percentage scores for the exam grades Grading schema name Year 10 History Report Image reportgrade1 Grading Band Band Name A Outstanding Band Values 81 To 100 Name B Very Good C Good DOK Enter a name for the Grading Schema and add a Report Image This provides a pictorial indicator of how well the Student has done For example a Student scoring 20 might hav
237. ol Deploy main window will appear TE NetSupport School Deploy kolbas File Deploy Tools View Help Ei Network Log Files security w a led a a la a w Hill Microsoft Windows Network Nila BCC Fil DEVELOPMENT Mil MARKETING a E E kaai a a ld a baai F MSHOME Ta Ng INVH336 INVH338 INVH344 INVH346 INVH349 INVH350 INVH351 INVH352 INVH357 Sis NSL a ECLSSROUE a ll la a lt ld lo a a T UK Ws WORKGROUP INVH359 INVH360 INVH367 INVH368 INVH369 INVH370 INVH371 INVH372 INVH383 fill TCP IP Network a al le ba E a lt INVH407 INVH4093 INVH415 INVH418 INVH419 INVH420 INVH423 INVH425 INVH426 INVH430 INVH432 INVH446 INVH447 INVH450 INVH501 NSLAPPOOL NSLAVO03 NSLBESOOL NSLCRM002 NSLCRMO003 NSLFILEOO2 NSLISA002 NSLMAILO03 NSLNETOO2 NSLSQLOO4 NSLSQLOO6 NSLWEBO03 NSLWEBO04 NSLWEBD TESTCRM001 TESTSQLOOL INVH116 INVH127 INVH285 INVH287 INVH288 INVH308 INVH310 INVH329 INVH335 The Deploy Main window is divided into the following sections Menu Bar The Menu bar contains a series of drop down menus that can be used to access the various tools and configuration utilities for the deploy process Left hand pane Contains three tabs Network Log Files and Security Network and Security Tabs List in a Tree view the available Networks Domains and Workgroups that can be selected for a deploy routine Log Files tab Lists in a Tree view a history of previous deployments 28 NetSuppo
238. ol Module will apply to the Students in the Co Browser session To Lock Students 1 Select File Lock Students from the Co Browser drop down menu Or Click the Lock Unlock icon on the toolbar and select Lock Students 2 Students will now be locked they will only be able to view websites that the Tutor shows them with no access to any of the Co Browse functions To Free Students 1 Select File Free Students from the Co Browser drop down menu Or Click the Lock Unlock icon on the toolbar and select Free Students 2 Students will now have control over the Co Browser and will be able to open new websites etc Any web pages or tabs selected by the Tutor will be left open 214 NetSupport School 11 41 To Restrict Students 1 Select File Restrict Students from the Co Browser drop down menu Or Click the Lock Unlock icon on the toolbar and select Restrict Students Students will be unlocked but they will only be able to access web pages or tabs left open by the Tutor Students will not have access to other websites or be able to open links on existing pages 215 NetSupport School 11 41 Application Control Module The Application Control module is used to monitor and control the applications used by connected Students A record of applications used in a session can be stored and if required the Tutor can restrict or approve the use of applications 1 Choose View Mode Application View from the Co
239. ool Scan Scan the following Clients PI Description S C scan GB and d GE Eddie end Lisa i Hep RA Sarah Removing the check mark next to a Client excludes it from the Scan Cancel Cancel Scan Interval Short 2 seconds Long Display one Client at a time Display multiple Clients at a time 2x2 ee Specify which Clients to Scan by removing or including the check mark next to the Client name Note If you want to start scanning from a particular Client select their icon in the Scan dialog a OS 116 Select the Scan interval Select Display one Client at a time Click Scan The Scan window will appear and immediately show you the first Client in the sequence It will cycle through the selected Clients showing their screens on the Control until you end the Scan NetSupport School 11 41 E NetSupport School Scan Alex Brown Eaton Scan View Window Help Kal ra ie a Previous Auto Next Scale Full Capture tofit Screen Screen shot OBB BBC Learning IT Free reso i E C www bbc co uk learning subjects infor mation_technology shtml ee i 6 June 2012 nae Le arni n g online learning support and advice BBC Homepage cre Y ide to IT I A Other subjects i u na our g L e to earning resources Arcand Design homepage and online courses Basic Skills Building Skills gag Adult Learning Business Studies Crafts Englis
240. or Video This ensures that each resource type is stored in the appropriate folder within the database Click the Import a Resource icon and browse for the required file Alternatively you can simply drag and drop the file directly into the list from its location using Windows explorer At the stage where you add your resources to a question if the required file isn t already in the database you can import it at that time 348 NetSupport School 11 41 Adding Resources To A Question Each Question Wizard will prompt you to add Resources at the appropriate stage 1 2 3 Decide which resource type is appropriate image sound or video and click Browse The resources list for the selected type will appear If the required file has already been imported into the database highlight it in the list and click Use You can preview the files before selecting them Or To add a new item to the list click Import and browse for the file When you have selected the file you can preview it to ensure it is the correct one It is also important that you include a suitable description for the item as this will appear in the Resources list rather than the file name Once added to the list click Use to add the item to the question Click Next Observation Mode Selecting this option allows you to force the Students to view a resource file before the question appears they will not be able to view the resource in the question When the
241. ort School s full range of features for example viewing student screens and showing their screen to students Selecting this component will also install a Portable Tutor folder this allows you to run the Tutor from a portable device such as USB Pen Drive Memory Stick or Flash Drive For further information please visit www netsupportsoftware com support and refer to Technical Document Running NetSupport School Tutor from a Portable Device document number 496 Note If you need the flexibility of allowing other machines to view this one you can also install the Student component Add Desktop Shortcut for Tutor Choose whether to create a desktop icon for the Control Tutor to enable easy access to the Tutor program 19 NetSupport School 11 41 Remote Deployment Utility The Remote Deploy Utility enables you to perform multiple NetSupport School installations without the need to visit each individual workstation Tech Console includes Remote Deployment Utility This component should be installed on workstations that will be managing and maintaining computers It provides lab technicians and network managers with the main NetSupport School features Add Desktop Shortcut for the Tech Console Choose whether to create a desktop icon to enable easy access to the Tech Console program Name and Connectivity Server This provides a simple and reliable method of locating and connecting to Student PCs Replay Conv
242. ort School works happily in Terminal Server shared resource virtual desktop and thin zero client computing environments Tutor Assistant A free component available from both the Apple and Android App stores the NetSupport Tutor Assistant delivers greater mobility for teachers around the ICT suite and is also the ideal tool to allow teaching assistants to help with monitoring student progress iPad iPod iPhone Android tablet and smartphone compatible once installed on a device the app pairs with the NetSupport desktop Tutor software allowing teachers the freedom to move around the classroom helping retain key control and monitoring of all student workstations devices Student for Android and iOS The NetSupport School Student for Android and iOS meets the challenges presented by the increased use of mobile technology in the modern classroom Enabling mobile learners to participate in NetSupport managed lessons once installed on students Android tablets and iOS devices teachers can interact with and support students from the traditional desktop Tutor application 10 NetSupport School 11 41 Student for Google Chrome Utilise the power of NetSupport School in a Google Chromebook education environment For use in an existing or new NetSupport managed classroom the NetSupport School Student for Google Chrome extension can be installed on each student Chromebook running Google Chrome OS Tutor for Google Chrome For use in
243. ow Video dialog 4 Confirm which Clients to include the Video file will already be selected and click Show NetSupport School Video Player Control Panel The Video Player Control Panel operates in a similar manner to all audio and visual aids Although the commands on the toolbar perform the same actions as would be expected please find a detailed explanation below Wildlifewmw NetSupport Video Player ce fC fe File View Play Help a ke Open Play Start End Mute Clients 00 00 00 30 o File Menu The File drop down menu contains the following options Open Allows you to select and load the appropriate video file Close Closes the open video file Exit Shuts down the Video Player View Menu The View drop down menu contains the following options Toolbar Hides and displays the Video Player toolbar Status Bar Hides and displays the Status bar of the Video Player Zoom Resizes the video screen 160 NetSupport School 11 41 Play Menu The Play drop down menu contains the following options Play Starts the loaded video file Stop Returns to the beginning of the loaded video file Pause Blanks the Clients video screen and pauses the video file at the Control workstation Repeat The video file will be repeated until the Tutor stops this Start Returns to the beginning of the video file End Fast forwards to the end of the video file Mute Clients If students are not using
244. ow drop down menu Or Click the Testing Console icon on the Control toolbar The Select Students dialog will appear From the list of connected Students indicate which ones should participate in the exam by checking or un checking the box next to their name Click Next to continue Test Modules aX Select the Students you would like to participate in the test a s8 Andy 2 Eddie g a Jane g ise Ce sos Cres C Select the exam to run Details of the published exams are listed choose the one that you want to run at the selected Student PCs If required you can alter the time limit for the exam Click Finish when ready to run the exam 363 NetSupport School 11 41 Test Modules s Select the Test you would like the students to participate in 4 d Creen taname 0010 EE osoa Unlimited Time ie lt a La oe 4 The NetSupport School Test Player will automatically launch at the Student PCs and a dialog enabling you to administer the exam will appear on the Tutor screen BT st ox oO BSe E A GA gt View Chat Pause Stop R Client L Test E Test The following Students are curently being tested Corect Inconect Q Remaining Name 2 Login Name Description Progress D sere Earp Jane Earp gt Testis running O08G0O 080008 D Merk Mark gt Student has let the Piyer wind OO OOOO OO eee Andy Andy gt Tes
245. ow drop down menu Select Student Selection Click the Connect to Students in Room s option and enter the required room If you want to acknowledge roaming Students click the checkbox Click Prompt at startup if you want the Tutor to be prompted to enter a room value each time the Tutor starts Click OK Click Yes to re initialise the Tutor configurator The Tutor will connect to all Students found and display their icons in the Control window Note A warning icon will be displayed next to Students that have been unable to connect Mouse over this icon to see the reason for the failed connection 69 NetSupport School 11 41 Creating a class for Students to join Publish Class The traditional method for establishing a connection with Students is for the Tutor to browse the local network to find the required machines However there may be occasions when the required Students are not available or the Students themselves wish to connect to a particular remote control session This feature enables the Tutor to create a class that the Students themselves can connect to Notes e Feature only supported over TCP IP connections e Tutor machines running Windows Vista or above will not accept join class requests from Students Creating a class for Students to join 1 To change the default methods of connection choose School Configuration Student Selection from the Control window drop down menu
246. owing statement is true or false Answer TRUE or FALSE Statement The Eiffel Toweris in Paris PY TRUE x e FALSE Q a 99 Enter the instructions for the question along with the statement that is true or false cok e Ca Cate Once you have completed part one of the wizard click Next 345 NetSupport School 11 41 Multi True or False Students are provided with up to four statements and they must decide whether they are true or false The first stage of three is to enter instructions for the questions along with up to four statements Alongside each of the statements choose whether they are true or false by selecting the appropriate button Multi True or false Select which of the following statements are true or false Answer TRUE or FALSE Statement The Empire State building is in Berlin The colosseum is in Rome The Pyramids are in Paris ag Big Ben is in London a9 Enter the question instructions Then add a statement and select whether the correct answer is true or false Once you have completed part one of the wizard click Next 346 NetSupport School 11 41 Order Items Students are required to correctly place up to four items in the correct order The first stage of three is to set the question with up to four answers in the correct order When the question is run at the Student machines the answers will be randomly arranged and the Stude
247. own menu Settings for Configuration NetSupport School g Ae Remote contol The Student Toolbar is displayed on the Student s desktop It can show gt View details about the class current lesson as well as Internet Application IM and gt rint status 2 Keyboard Mouse F 23 Replay Files 3 Audio 7 Enable Student Toolbar t File Transfer Make the toolbar always visible 4 D User Interface Toolbar options 2 Tutor Student v Show the Image associated with this Student a V Shows the logged on user name or name entered on the Stude amp Tutor Assistant 7 Class and Teacher Information Group Leaders 7 Show amount of time left in the Lesson z LT Student Toolbar Z Indicate when typing is being monitored Journal J Show Instant Messenger metering state Show V Show Printer status Blocked Paused etc YZ Show Application Monitoring status and give access to approvi v Show Internet Monitoring status and give access to approved v Allow the Student to initiate a Chat Allow the Student to send a request for help F Shou Fack W r Enable the Toolbar and decide whether to make it always visible Alternatively if the Toolbar is minimised the Student can mouse over the top of their screen to make it appear If the Tutor changes a setting that affects a toolbar option a message will appear For example enabling Internet restrictions 262 NetSupport School 11 41 Note You can quickly s
248. ox and click Add Specify the folder at the Student workstation to copy the files to A new folder will be created if necessary Click Send The result of the operation will be displayed for you to check that the work has been sent successfully To Send Work Using Advanced Send 1 2 188 Decide which Students to send work to All or a defined group You will have the opportunity to exclude Students if required Choose School Send Collect Work Advanced from the Control window drop down menu bar Or Click the Send Collect Work icon on the Control toolbar and select Send Collect The Send Collect Work wizard will open E Send Collect Work Ea Select an operation from the list and click Send Work or Collect Work Add a new operation by clicking New modify an existing operation by selecting it and clicking Properties Description Last Sent Last Collected Status Students Send Work Year 12 Solar System Wed Apr 11 10 41 10 2012 XP SP3 Collect Work Help lt m New l Remove Properties Reset Close Select an operation from the list and click Send Work The Select Students dialog will appear Or Add a new operation by clicking New and completing the wizard NetSupport School 11 41 Once work has been sent to the Students you will be able to see the current status from the Send Collect Work icon drop down menu You can toggle between showing Students who have completed their wo
249. per Check this box if you want the Client s wallpaper to be visible when viewing Normally this is turned off to improve performance so expect the screen update speed to be impacted by selecting this option Blank Client screen This enables the Control to blank the client screen in any of the View modes 300 NetSupport School 11 41 Video Skipping A Controls Viewing performance can be configured using Video Skipping The Control program will not display Client screen updates if a subsequent update to the area of the screen is made Unticking the box will result in all Client screen updates being displayed at the Control Auto Clipboard When enabled provides the quickest method for copying data Use the short cut keys Ctrl C amp Ctrl V to automatically copy to and from the clipboard at both the Tutor and Student machines Default Mode When you view a Client by default you start viewing in Share mode If you prefer to start viewing in a different way change the style from the list provided Cache Size The NetSupport School Control contains a cache to help improve overall performance The cache sizes range from 256KB to 16Mb and a separate cache is allocated to each Client connection If you are running applications on the Client that uses lots of or large bitmaps increase the cache size to improve the performance Max Colour Depth When you connect to a Client you can restrict the Colour Depth that is sent This is
250. pplication on the Tutor workstation 8 NetSupport School 11 41 Notes e Check that Client applications are stored in the same location as the Control to ensure successful execution e If you want to launch a specific file with the application you must separate the two instructions with quotes For example C Program Files Microsoft Office Excel exe C My Documents Accounts xls Click OK The application icon will be displayed in the Launch Application dialog and saved for future use Note If you only want to execute applications to Clients that are logged on select the option Execute Only if the Client is Logged on Select the required application and click Launch Note Before clicking Launch you have the option to tick the Show Errors box This will notify you of any errors when launching applications at Students This option is only available will launching to multiple Students To Launch an Application on a group of Students 1 2 A Select the required Group tab Choose Group Launch Applications from the Control window drop down menu bar The Launch Application dialog will appear Click Add Enter the name and path of the application to launch at the Student Or Click the Browse button and select an executable application on the Tutor workstation Note Check that Client applications are stored in the same location as the Control to ensure successful execut
251. pted before each task is due to begin and they can choose whether to continue or abort At any point during a task you can use the tools on the Lesson bar to pause skip to next item or abort the lesson Note If you simply want a timed session without the need to run a pre defined Lesson Plan select Planner Set Class Time from the Control window drop down menu This enables you to select an end time for the lesson or the duration The timer will appear on the Lesson bar and can be switched off by selecting Planner Set Class Time Remove The timer shows hours minutes until there is 5 minutes remaining when it will switch to minutes seconds 261 NetSupport School 11 41 Student Toolbar The Student toolbar provides feedback to the Student on the current lesson time remaining current websites and applications that are available the status of messenger print audio and keyboard monitoring and quick access to initiate a Chat and request help Students can also access their USB memory stick Student Journal work items that have been sent and any resources from the toolbar It can be set to be always visible at the top of the Student screen or to auto hide gt Jane Earp 40 07 2012 ICT Level 2 Class A All features included on the Toolbar can be customised by the Tutor To select the features to be made available on the Toolbar choose View Current Settings Student Toolbar from the Control window drop d
252. ptions while Annotating Chat File Transfer etc 1 View the required Client Select Tools Annotate from the View window drop down menu Or Click the Annotate icon on the View window toolbar 3 The Annotate Toolbar will appear To annotate a screen while Exhibiting The screen of a Client that is being Exhibited can be Annotated in order to draw the attention of the other Students to a particular learning point Depending on the Mode being used both the Control and or the Exhibited Client can use the Annotate options 1 Exhibit the required Client screen 2 Select Tools Annotate from the Exhibit window drop down menu Or Click the Annotate icon on the Exhibit window toolbar 3 The Annotate Toolbar will appear Note If you do not want the Student s to see the screen being annotated in real time click Suspend This freezes the Show enabling the Tutor or Exhibited Client to continue working in the background Click Resume to restart the Show this refreshes the display at the Student screens Annotate Toolbar Annotate em AA File Edit Tool Colour Width Font File Save Screen Saves the Annotated screen to a file Save Selection When the select region tool is active you can highlight an area of the screen and save it to a file 149 NetSupport School 11 41 Exit Ends Annotate but stays in Show Exhibit or View mode Edit Clear Annotations Clears the annotations Undo Undo the most re
253. r Android Students in Room mode Oo OY eS If you selected the Tablet students only licence type during installation the NetSupport School Tutor will only display the features that are supported for Tablet Students Note In certain environments the NetSupport School Tutor Console may not locate the Android Students during its browse For further information on how to locate and connect to Android devices please visit www netsupportsoftware com support and in the Knowledge Base refer to Technical Document What to do if the Android Students are not found by a Tutor Console browse at startup document number 738 Features supported on Android e Student Register 87 NetSupport School 11 41 Lesson objective Receive Messages from the Tutor Student Request help Group or 1 1 Chat Student Survey Lock Unlock student computers Real Time Instruction Show Mode View Student thumbnails Watch Student screen Student rewards WiFi battery indicators Launch URL at the Student Blank Student screen Question and Answer mode File Transfer File Distribution Launch at Startup The NetSupport School Student for Android will launch when the device is powered on and will automatically sign in where the device is located in a fixed room These features are only available on Android devices that have been signed by the manufacturer Installing and configuring the NetSupport School Student for
254. r View Settings This property sheet provides configuration options for the Viewing of Client workstations The View Settings can be configured in two ways 1 To apply the settings for all Client View sessions choose View Current Settings View from the Control window drop down menu 2 To apply the settings for an individual Client View session View the Client and choose View Settings for Client View from the View window drop down menu Settings for Configuration NetSupport School mtm a Remote Control Options thos View F BIOS Keyboard F Scrollbars Keyboard Mouse 7 Confirm Switch to Full Screen 7 Use Compression Replay Files Full Screen Wallpaper 3 Audio Scale to Fit Blank Client Screen e 5 Disconnect when Closed Video Skipping 9 File Transfer Screen Scrape 7 Auto Clipboard 4 5 User Interface Tutor S Student Default Mode l Share X Tutor Assistant Cache Spe ame z Lo ca Grp Leas Max Colour Depth Unlimited X t Student Toolbar Journal show Change DOS Font Change Japanese Fort Update Configuration NetSupport Schoo OK l Cancel Help A brief description of the available options follows BIOS Keyboard Checking this option causes the Control to emulate keystrokes on the Client at the BIOS level rather than the Hardware level Use this if an application at the Client does not appear to be correctly accepting keystrokes from
255. r can provide read only access allowing Students to view files from devices but prevents copying files from them 1 Choose View Mode Device View from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Device Control icon on the left hand side of the Control window Student Quick Requests T Desktop Launch Qm T A I covo alf Ll use aff Mute sound f Unmute Sound Unavailable S History Year 2 Note A padlock will be displayed next to the Device Control view icon when there are global policy restrictions in force You can override the restrictions in the Tutor configuration In the List view the Student icons can be viewed in two ways Choose View Large icons Details or right click in the List view and select one of these options to change the layout of the Student icons 250 NetSupport School 11 41 When viewing the Large icons layout an icon is displayed next to the Student icon informing the Tutor of the current Device restrictions If the List view is in Details layout a summary of Device restrictions for each Student is displayed Note Device restrictions can be applied at startup Choose School Configuration Start Options Restrictions from the Control window drop down menu Block Access to CD DVD or USB Devices 1 Select the required Students in the List view 2 Choose Device CD USB Block Access from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the CD DVD icon
256. r can connect to Students within a Terminal Server environment For ease of implementation NetSupport School provides a downloadable setup package which will guide you through the required installation and configuration processes Our online Knowledge Base provides full instructions please visit www netsupportsoftware com support and refer to the Technical Document Setting Up NetSupport School to runina Microsoft Terminal Server Environment TD128 Note Terminal Server and other thin clients may not be configured to use the NetSupport School Name and Connectivity Server Connecting to a NetSupport School Student running in a Terminal server session The preferred method to connect to the Students running in the Terminal Server Sessions is using the Connect via Room Mode option Using this method it s possible to configure the Students running in the Terminal Server sessions to be located in a particular room depending on the User logged onto the Session Once the Tutor is configured to the same room as the Students it will automatically connect to all Students located in the room Note The Student Terminal Server settings can be configured in the NetSupport School Client Configurator 79 NetSupport School 11 41 Installing and Configuring the NetSupport School Tutor Assistant For use in your existing NetSupport School managed classroom environment the NetSupport School Tutor Assistant delivers greater mobility for
257. r runs locally on each Client workstation and the video file can be accessed locally or from a network drive If video files are stored locally the impact on the network is minimised as only the data to control the player e g start stop pause and synchronisation packets are sent If each Client machine retrieves the video file from a network drive you will place additional demands on the network For optimum performance store the video files locally on each workstation you may wish to use File Distribution to do this Other influencing factors will be e The number of Client workstations accessing the file e The speed of the network e g 10 100 MB e The size of the video file e Client workstation memory performance specification e Other traffic on the network Notes e If the video file to be played does not exist on the Student machine NetSupport School will automatically send it to the Student e Ifa Client workstation is required to retrieve files from a Server for smooth operation ensure that the Client workstation has sufficient access rights to the relevant drive and files e The quality of the display will be affected by the video adapter of the workstation and how the screen resolution is configured 158 NetSupport School 11 41 Play a Video file on a workstation 1 Choose Student Show Show Video from the Control window drop down menu Or Right click a Client icon in the List view and choose
258. raa e aa aa Daa na cia de 271 User Interface SettihgS erinorm aaa aea a aa 272 Advanced SettiNgS arke ianen ea a EaD nT detenectareceus iy tans 274 Student Journal Settings niaaa dann aiaia Aa a 277 Terminal Services SettiNgS cccsccccccscscsescesacececesacansaustecereeesesenseesens 278 CONFIGURING THE TUTOR WORKSTATION cscseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeae 280 Stat Options ysis seretd cen a a a ieee abtinn A A E A a 281 NetSupport School 11 41 Tutor Startup REStrictiONS asana doves vokeeerateadevdaeed A EEA 282 Network and Wireless SettingS cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens eens sees eeeaeaeas 284 Performance Settings saci cdecteseia seein seek i aaa E tadina 288 Student Seletti Mrica oaan se ange edad REENE i Eaa 289 NetSupport Protect Switch Desktop Protection Off eseeeeeees 291 Administration Security Settings s ssssssrsssessrssrrrrrsrrnenrrnnsrrerrrrens 292 Administration Profiles ccccccceeeeeee eee ease eee seer seen aeaeaeaeaeaeeeeeaes 294 CONFIGURING REMOTE CONTROL SETTINGS c cscseseeeeeeeeeeeees 297 Tutor View SettihgS csiei seis scenceeievtenetceuemerdieuna eaaa aK aa 299 Tutor Keyboard Mouse SettingS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeee cece sees eens ee eeeeeaeneas 302 Replay File Setting S ren rto ianiai ninen RE EnaA EEE ES ened areata aes 304 A dio SCttINGS isard aeia a sine AA A teed aAa lise ae 305 Tutor File Transfer SettingS ccccccscsesescececececeseacsavseeceeceeeetenseeeens 3
259. re connected Selected Client A Client or group of connected Clients can be selected by the Control The Control can then perform a variety of functions such as View Show and Message etc A Control can switch between multiple Clients making each of them in turn the selected Clients 12 NetSupport School 11 41 INSTALLATION Installing NetSupport School is exceptionally easy and you should be up and running within a very short time Decide what functions to install If you wish to manage the class as the teacher you will need to install the Tutor Control on your machine On every student machine you wish to connect to you need to install the Student Client To allow technicians to manage and maintain the school s network as well as providing technical support you can install the Technicians Console Note The NetSupport School Tutor is configured to use TCP IP Recommended method to connect to Students Clients Room Mode is a quick and easy method to connect to the Clients in a given room A startup wizard will allow you to assign machines to a particular room and at the start of a lesson the teacher simply indicates which of the pre defined rooms they wish to connect to Roaming Students also have the option of connecting to a designated room The Room settings can also be configured at the Student in the NetSupport School Student Configurator Other ways to connect the Tutor to the Studen
260. ready to proceed 4 Depending on the category selected Exams Questions Resources etc the Wizard will now prompt you to choose from a tree view the specific items to be exported Select each item in turn and click the Add Item To Export List button When the Export List is complete click Next 5 The Wizard will confirm the items to be exported Any resources associated with exams or questions are included Check the details and if required click Back to change the information 6 Click Finish to begin exporting 7 A progress dialog will appear Click Close when complete Note Exported data is not removed from the Designer Importing Data 1 Choose File Import from the Designers drop down menu or click the Import icon on the main toolbar 2 The Import Database dialog will appear Browse for the required Export file and click Open 3 Click Import DB to start importing If the file has been protected you will be prompted for the password 362 NetSupport School 11 41 4 A progress dialog will appear Click Close when complete Note To refresh the Interface with the imported data logout of the Designer The Testing Console Having used the Test Designer to create questions and exams you use the Testing Console option in the NetSupport School Tutor program to run the exam at Student workstations and monitor results Running an Exam 1 Select School Testing Console from the Control wind
261. ree and click Print Report When ready close the window to return to the Test Console dialog from where you can exit the test This will clear the results or reports from the Student screens Send to Journal Allows you to send a copy of Students result to their Student Journal The Student then has the opportunity to review their answers after the lesson 367 NetSupport School 11 41 The Test Player The NetSupport School Test Player is the testing utility that loads at Student PCs when an exam is running The Tutor uses the Testing Console option to choose the Students to participate in the exam and select the exam to run At this point the Test Player loads automatically at each Student PC When the Tutor starts the exam the first question appears and the Students can then work their way through the exam Exemple Test 1 Complete the information on the Mass of each planet 2 jel 3 p Please select one answer e The Mass of Mercury is 5 of Eath 4 p 5 p The Mass of Jupiter is 317 tes more than Earth v 6 p The Mass of Mars is 10 of Eaith v 7 Pp 8 p The Mase of Salum i 9 p 10 p u W 00 14 38 The Test Player window displays the following Exam Time Counts down the time remaining Question List Numbered buttons indicate how many questions there are in the exam The Student can click these to quickly move between questions Useful at the end of the exam to review answers and to make changes before t
262. reen when their keyboard and mouse are locked The default NetSupport School image can be replaced by one of your own choosing by setting the location of the file in the Client Configurator Student Advanced Settings dialog Mute sound when locking mouse keyboard or blanking screen Sound will be muted at Students when locking the mouse keyboard or blanking the screen Student to Student Chat Check this option to enable Students to initiate a group Chat session with other connected Students Lock Unlock When using the Lock function the Students mouse and keyboard are locked by default However there may be occasions when you still want the Student to be able to use their mouse or keyboard 312 NetSupport School 11 41 Check uncheck the appropriate box es as required Note Both boxes must be checked when the Blank screen when locking mouse and keyboard option is used NetSupport School 11 41 Tutor Assistant Settings Configure the settings for the NetSupport School Tutor Assistant Settings for Configuration NetSupport School nee 4 Remote Control Tutor Assistant System Configuration 2 View Tutor Name ID Custom System Status 23 Keyboard Mouse NSS Tutor 7 Stopped 2 Replay Files m Start Audio Current Network Address A ARR Fie Transfer F Start System When Tutor Starts 4 Ry User Interface Connection Port Connection Password 3 Tutor 37777 Student Z Show Password Tutor Assistant Authorised Assistan
263. reens simultaneously 1 Choose Group Scan from the Control window drop down menu Or Select the Scan button from the Control toolbar 2 The Scan dialog will appear 3 Specify which Clients to Scan by removing or including the check mark next to the Client name 4 Select Display multiple Clients at a time 5 Select number of Client screens to be displayed in the Scan window 6 If scanning more than four Client screens select a Scan interval 7 Click Scan 8 The Scan windowwill appear Note If Scanning more Client screens than the number of screens displayed in the Scan window by using the Next Auto and Previous buttons you are able to switch between multiple Scan Windows 1P NetSupport School Scan Brn Scan Client View Window Help es Scale Andy O as FJ J oo 119 NetSupport School 11 41 The toolbar buttons for a multiple Client Scan Window have the following functions Previous Auto and Next buttons You can turn auto timing on or off from the Scan window toolbar or choose to move forwards or backwards between individual Clients The Previous button shows the previous Client screen scanned The Next button shows the next Clients screen in the scan cycle Scaling to Fit It may be that the Client is running in a higher resolution than the Control In this case choosing the Scale to Fit button will re size its
264. refer to knowledgebase article 582 for further information www netsupportsoftware com support Testing Module The Test Designer requires MDAC 2 1 or higher and COMCTL32 dll version 5 80 or higher During installation NetSupport will check to see if these files are present and advise if not However if installing silently using the NetSupport School Deploy utility you will not be warned if the files are missing 14 NetSupport School 11 41 Note To enable printer notifications to be sent to the Tutor PC the installer applies the following changes to the Student PCs Windows Firewall On installation Windows Firewall entries are automatically added to allow the product to be used for the active network If you change to another network you may need to extend the scope of the Windows Firewall entries to allow connections to continue to be allowed through the Windows Firewall The File and Print Sharing Exception is enabled on Windows XP SP2 and Windows Vista The scope of port TCP 139 is changed from Subnet to ANY on Windows XP SP2 Local Security Policy Settings On Windows Vista or higher workgroup connected PCs the following local policy settings are set Network Access Allow anonymous ENABLED SID Name translation Network Access Do not allow anonymous DISABLED enum of SAM accounts Network Access Do not allow anonymous DISABLED enum of SAM accounts amp shares Network Access Let everyone pe
265. refer back to this after the lesson Choose Typing Add Target Word List to Journal from the Control window drop down menu e The Target Word List can be viewed in the Student Toolbar choose Typing Allow Students to View Target Words from the Control window drop down menu Add a Word to your Target or Inappropriate List 1 Click to add a word to your Target or Inappropriate list Or Right click in the list box and select Add Word The Add Word list dialog will appear Type in the word to be added Click OK The word will appear under the Target or Inappropriate list mn AUN Remove a Word from your Target or Inappropriate List 1 To remove a word from the list simply highlight the chosen word and click X Or Right click in the list box and select Remove Word Create a new Word List 1 Choose Typing Create new Word List 2 A dialog will appear Enter a file name and click Create 3 A new blank Word list will appear 130 NetSupport School 11 41 Open an Existing Word List 1 Choose Typing Load Existing Word List 2 Highlight the relevant file and click Open 3 The existing Word list will appear Save a Word List 1 Choose Typing Save Word List as 2 A dialog will appear Enter a file name and click Save 3 The current Word list will be saved Notes e Any changes that have been made to the new or existing Word list will be automatically saved when a new Word list is created or whe
266. reless ClASSFOOM cc eeceeese ee ee eeeen eens 90 Using a Name Server Gateway to Find Student PCS sceeeeeeeeeees 92 Installing amp Configuring a Name Server eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eee 93 Gateway Configuration General Properties c cceeeeeeeeee teens 94 Gateway Configuration Creating KeYS cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 96 Gateway Configuration Utility Licenses tab c sceeeeeeeeeeee eee 97 Gateway Configuration Utility Security tab ccceeeeeeeeeeeee eee ee 98 Working With GroupS miserine nane aaa a a ia 99 Group Leaders Aira ty iad a a aaa voted aaa 101 Customise Client and Group ICONS cceeeeee cece cece tesa ease eee eeeeeeaeaee 104 USING NETSUPPORT SCHOOL sccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeueeeeeeeeeeeeanae 105 Locking Student Controls and Blanking Student Screens 0055 106 To blank a Student s screen when locked eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 106 To display a graphic when locking a Student workstation 06 107 Viewing Student SCreeNS ccccccceceneeeeeeeeeeceeaeneaeeeeeeeecenennenaneenees 109 Blanking the Clients screen while Viewing eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 112 Sending Ctrl Alt Delete while VieWiING ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 112 Viewing multiple screens SIMUItANEOUSIY ceeeee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee ees 112 Blank All Client Screen S irenda enna tiini aaa aiaa 113 Remote Clipboard asa
267. remain until the Student clicks OK Creating Preset Messages You can store up to four commonly used text messages that can be quickly broadcast to Students using the Message feature 1 Click Communicate on the toolbar and select Edit under Preset Messages Or Select Student Message Preset Messages from the Control window drop down menu Or Right click a Student icon and choose Message Preset Messages 177 NetSupport School 11 41 Preset Messages Message 1 The network will be shut down in 20 mins m Icon Dismiss after Play sound Message 2 Intemet access willbe restricted forthe dura a eon L Dismiss after Play sound Message 3 Message 4 Waming 20 seconds i Infomation v 10 seconds 2 Enter the required text message s 3 Set any additional properties for each of the messages e Indicate how long the message should remain on the Students screen e Choose an icon to be displayed alongside the message This can be used to quickly identify the type of message Information Question Warning and Stop e You can further highlight the message by playing a sound at the Student machine 4 Click OK when ready To Send a Pre Defined Message 1 Select the required Student icons 2 Right click and select Message Or Choose Student Message from the drop down menu Or Click the Communicate icon 3 Each of the pre defined messages will be displayed cli
268. required Replay file Click Show 5 The Replay Window will open at the Tutor machine and start playing the Replay file to the selected Students 6 Click End on the Replay window toolbar to end the show 169 NetSupport School 11 41 Converting Replay Files to Video Files NetSupport School Replay files can be converted to video files allowing them to be played outside of NetSupport School on a range of media players Replay files can be converted to WMV and AVI formats Converting Replay Files 1 Select School Replay Files from The Control window 2 The Replay Files dialog will open 3 Select the Replay files to convert and click Convert File 4 The wizard will guide you through the conversion process Using the Replay Conversion Utility For more advanced options when converting Replay files a Replay conversion utility is provided allowing you to control video resolution audio quality start and end points of the video and much more Note The Replay conversion utility is installed by default when installing the NetSupport School Tutor or Tech Console You can also install the utility as a standalone component 1 Select Start Programs NetSupport School NetSupport School Replay Note On Windows 8 machines right click in the Start screen and choose All Apps at the bottom of the screen Click the NetSupport School Replay icon The Replay conversion utility will open Browse for the required Replay f
269. rk or those with items remaining The Students can open work items from the Student toolbar and click when a work item is complete this will then update the status in the Send Collect Work icon drop down menu Send Collect Work E Q Sent work status Name Status Sarah Smith All work complete Simon Green All work complete remaining Send Work Send files to a specified folder on all Students Collect Work Collect files from all Students Send Collect Send Work to or Collect Work from Students To Collect work Two methods are available for retrieving completed work files from Student workstations The Quick Collect option remembers the last file s sent via Quick Send and provides a quick and easy method for retrieving the work back at the end of a session Advanced Collect lets you select the file s to retrieve from a list of pre defined Send Collect operations and provides greater flexibility as to which Students the work is collected from 189 NetSupport School 11 41 To Collect Work Using Quick Collect 1 Choose School Send Collect Work Quick Collect from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Send Collect Work icon on the Control toolbar and select Collect Work Or If displayed click the Collect Work icon on the Control toolbar The Quick Collect dialog will appear Quick Collect esa Ready to collect files from students sent on Wed Apr 11 10 29 58 2012
270. rmissions ENABLED apply to anonymous users Network Access Restrict anonymous access DISABLED to Named Pipes and Shares 15 NetSupport School 11 41 Starting the Installation Insert the NetSupport School installation CD into your computer and let it autorun If it does not autorun run the NETSUPMENU exe command from the CD Alternatively you can download your copy of NetSupport School from www netsupportschool com downloads asp Click the appropriate language from the menu and select the option to install NetSupport School Select which installer to use setup exe or MSI file If an Active Directory deployment is required you will need to install using the MSI file The NetSupport School installation will start displaying a Welcome screen Click Next to continue Notes e If you are upgrading your Windows operating system you must ensure that you de install NetSupport prior to upgrading NetSupport can then be re installed once the operating system upgrade has been completed e When installing ensure you are logged in as an Administrator When installing NetSupport School on Windows 7 Windows 2008 Server R2 Windows 8 and Windows 2012 Server the Filter Driver may not be installed if you do not have the required Service Pack and hotfixes You can still proceed with the NetSupport School installation without the Filter Driver but some Internet Control features will be unavailable including Block FTP and SafeSearch
271. rompt 329 student security settings 327 terminal server 79 terminology used 12 tesing module true or false question 343 test designer 331 test player 366 testing console 361 testing module adding resources to questions 346 combo list question 339 create exam 353 create questions 334 delete exam 357 delete questions subjects topics 350 drag and drop image question 338 drag and drop text question 337 edit exam 356 exam grades 352 exams mode 351 import export data 360 introduction 330 label image question 340 multi true or false question 344 multi choice question 336 order items question 345 preview exam 356 publish exam 357 question scores 355 questions mode 333 reviewing results 364 run exam 361 select Students for exam 361 setting up user accounts 358 starting the designer 331 store questions 348 test player 366 testing console 361 what the Student sees 366 timed lesson 259 toolbar customise 46 tools add 195 transfer files 180 transport configure at Client 266 true or false question 343 Tutor See Control tutor assistant 80 configure settings 312 tutor assistant settings 312 tutor journal settings 316 tutor keyboard mouse settings 300 Tutor profiles 252 292 tutor toolbar 50 tutor user interface settings 308 tutor view settings 297 unattended installation 24 specify parameters 25 understanding ip addresses 77 unlock lock mouse and keyboard 105 user ackno
272. rt School 11 41 Right hand pane With the Network tab selected you are provided with a range of general information machine name and platform for example about the workstations located on the selected network domain The Log Files tab provides a breakdown of past deployments categorised by type The Security tab also lists information specific to each individual workstation located on the chosen network domain In addition to the machine name you will be able to identify the IP Address determine if the machine already has a NetSupport School Client installed and which version is running whether the Client is password protected or has User Acknowledgement set With this information to hand you can decide in advance which machines to include or exclude from the forthcoming deployment For example if a current NetSupport School Client is already installed at some of the workstations you might choose to ignore it Preparing a Deployment Choosing Who To Deploy To 1 From the main window select the Network or Security tab 2 A list of available Networks Domains and Workgroups will appear in the left hand pane Expand or reduce the tree list by clicking on or Note You can also deploy to specific IP Ranges by adding the appropriate address range to the tree Select Tools Add IP Domain from the Menu bar 3 Highlight the required group 4 The names of the workstations belonging to the selected group will appear in the right
273. rt School 11 41 Show Settings The Show feature allows you to display the Tutor screen on all some or one of the Student s screens From here you can configure the settings for a Show Settings for Configuration NetSupport School 4 Remote Control Show View Screen Scrape 2 Keyboard Mouse Show Hotkeys Replay Files Send Physical Fonts Audio i File Transfer Restrict Intemet access to approved sites only during show 4 8 User Interface Tutor Student t Tutor Assistant b Group Leaders t Student Toolbar t Journal t show Cancel Hep e Screen Scrape NetSupport School s favoured and the most efficient method for capturing screen data is to hook into the Video Driver of the workstation being viewed However there may be occasions when this method will not work because certain applications bypass the driver In these circumstances you can enable screen scrape mode in order to take a snapshot of the screen Although this will have a greater impact on the network it will at least provide an accurate representation of the Client s screen Show Hotkeys To ensure that all actions performed by the Control are visible to the Clients during a show you can enable the use of Hotkeys Any key combinations that the Control uses e g CTRL V will be displayed in a balloon at both the Control and Client screens 320 NetSupport School 11 41 Send Physical Fonts In order to reduce the volume of data being sent
274. s been made close the dialog The name of the connected Student will appear at the Control 71 NetSupport School 11 41 Class Lists With NetSupport School you have the option to create Class Lists this provides you with a quick and convenient way of saving multiple Student lists for all your different classes The Class List can then be loaded at the start of a lesson and you can quickly connect to the Student machines Class Lists are created automatically when using PC Mode User Mode or the Publish Class connection mode You can switch to these modes in the NetSupport School Tutor Configurator Note A command line utility can be used to generate Class Lists outside the Tutor program The Class List Processor enables you to produce Class Lists in advance based on data that may have been supplied from an external source The file classlistprocessor exe is installed in the Program Folder along with explanatory notes as to its use classlistprocessordocumentation txt To End a Class 1 Choose School Manage Class End Class from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Manage icon in the toolbar and select End Class 2 Your current class will be ended and the Class Wizard will appear allowing you to start a new lesson Notes If the Tutor machine does not have write access to the Class Lists folder the Tutor will not be able to create new Class Lists or edit existing ones You can specify the loca
275. s no security key set here any Control may connect regardless of the security key set at the Control 269 NetSupport School 11 41 Enable User Acknowledgement If enabled a Remote Control session cannot take place until the Client has confirmed that they accept the link being made Display Customisable Text When Connected The message entered here is displayed at the Client machine when a Control connects to it When Viewed The message entered here is displayed at the Client machine when it is being Viewed by the Control Configurator Security Settings Configurator Password As an extra level of security you can associate a password with a Configuration File This prevents unauthorised amendment of this Client s configuration When the Configurator is next started the user must enter the required password before being able to change any Client parameters in this Configuration file Choose Set to set your password Enable user acknowledgement for Tech Console connections applies to Tutor only installs If enabled the Tech Console will not be able to connect to a Tutor machine until the Tutor has confirmed that they accept the link being made Note By default Windows XP machines will automatically request user acknowledgement from the Tutor you will need to enable then disable this option to turn this off Don t apply global policies to this computer Any policy restrictions set in the Tech Console will not be
276. s or as a standalone component beens Sa are ey noe eo Go i Shicenis sao jas To start the Tech Console choose Start Programs NetSupport School NetSupport School Tech Console In Windows 8 click the NetSupport School Tech Console icon in the Start screen 322 NetSupport School 11 41 When the Tech Console loads for the first time the Control Configuration dialog will appear This enables the Control to specify the Clients to connect to at startup The dialog will not appear in future sessions Note If required a message can be displayed at a Tutor workstation when a connection is made See Student Security tab for further details In the List view the connected Clients can be viewed in two different ways Image Mode displays a thumbnail view of the Client screen providing a quick and easy method for monitoring activity Report Mode displays details of the Student machines such as name IP address user name Client platform current security state policy settings room running application and all websites To toggle between views Choose Views Image Mode Report Mode or Click the View icon on the toolbar Note From Report mode you can activate and close Applications and Websites on a Student by right clicking the required icon From the Status bar you can resize the Client thumbnails using a convenient slider bar change the thumbnail refresh rate and automa
277. screen to fit the window in which it is displayed Maximise To enlarge a Client View window This button will be greyed out until you select a Client View window To maximise the Client View window click the Maximise button or click the box in the top right hand corner of the Client View window Lock To lock a selected Client s keyboard and mouse Chat To initiate a chat session between a Client and the Control Share To View a Client in Share Mode Capture A snapshot of the current Client view window will be taken You will then have the option to name and save the current screen contents to a file To end the Scan 1 Choose Scan Close from the Scan window drop down menu 120 NetSupport School 11 41 Monitor Mode Monitor Mode similar to the Scan feature enables the Tutor to view multiple Student screens simultaneously ock Un oar rh Orheoisze ES D w NETSUPPORT S SCHOOL Fe E Af ver sees fo mon ese T osuen jmo Tutor Assistant A convenient thumbnail view of each connected Student screen is displayed at the Tutor providing a quick and easy method for monitoring Student activity While in Monitor mode the Tutor still has access to the full range of NetSupport School features such as View Chat and File Transfer 1 Choose View Mode Monitor View from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Monitor Mode icon on
278. seful Annotate tool that be used to highlight areas of a Tutor or Student s screen in order to emphasise a key learning point To annotate a Show screen Whi le the Control screen is being shown the tutor may want to draw the student s attention to a particular area The Annotate tools can be used to highlight the relevant part of the screen 1 While Showing right click the NetSupport School Showing icon or the NetSupport School Task bar button and select Annotate Screen Or Double click the Annotate icon The Annotate toolbar will appear Select the tool colour etc and use the mouse to draw over the relevant part of the Control screen Notes If you do not want the Student s to see the screen being annotated in real time click Suspend This freezes the Show enabling the Tutor to continue working in the background Click Suspend again to restart the Show this refreshes the display at the Student screens To include a screenshot of the Show in the Student Journal select Send to Journal from the Annotate Options menu or use shortcut keys CTRL ALT Print Screen you can also add notes to accompany the image 148 NetSupport School 11 41 To annotate a screen while Viewing While Viewing the Control can use the Annotate tools to highlight a particular area of the Client screen In Share and Watch Mode the Client can also use the Annotate toolbar options The Control can still use the other View window o
279. ses tab Displays all licenses stored in the NetSupport School directory if you do not have an Internet connection you can manually activate your NetSupport School licence here E NetSupport Gateway Configuration Utility Ea General Keys Licenses Security Available license files License File Serial Quantity Status NSM LIC PCS100419 350 Clients _ Cancel __ Apply Hep An activation code is required contact NetSupport or your Reseller for this Click Requires Activation and enter the code You will then need to restart the Name Server Note If an Internet connection is available the licence will activate automatically and the Name Server does not need to be restarted 97 NetSupport School 11 41 Gateway Configuration Utility Security tab The NetSupport School Gateway provides support for an enhanced level of encryption to be used when initiating communications from remote computers r e NetSupport Gateway Configuration Utility Ez General Keys Licenses Securty V Enable encryption of communications to remote computers Block any remote computers not using encrypted communications 0k canca Ay Hep Enable encryption of communications to remote computers When enabled all communications in the connection process are encrypted Note The remote computers Controls and Clients need to be running version 10 61 or later Bloc
280. shown to Students At a local level the NetSupport School Client program also provides a Replay option enabling Clients to launch files At the Control 1 Choose School Replay Files from the Control window drop down menu Or If displayed click the Playback icon on the toolbar 2 Select the required Replay File and click Play Replay File 3 The Replay Window will open and start playing the file 2 NetSupport School Replay C Users Marketing Documents My Recordings Local_04072012_1111_13 rpf b File View Replay Window Help G e bitdi Scale Full Capture Start Back Step Skip hoo 0 30 1 00 1 30 200 23 to fit Screen Screen shot A Youg solar system Q Browse TVShows Films Upload CREA Mie Exploring The Solar System Bestofscience 3 Subscribe 190 videos With Loy by SAMSL 114 245 vi Solar Sy by bestjoni 78 058 vi 6 47 j D Wonder bow 296 vie cE ene The Sole X Sat 7 de ike share p 66 396 m Uploaded by Best0fScience on 16 Aug 2010 http www facebook com ScienceReason Science ESA Episode 7 eT Exploring our backyard the Solar System Part 1 The Bigs st nth nated nn tan EO st wen Rabanne Boon wun g D Comments i oe Playing 0 02 37 10 Client Local Date amp Time 11 11 13 04 Jul 2012 o 4 Choose File Close from the drop down menu to close the window 166 NetSupport School 11 41 At the Client 1 Right click the NetSupport School Client icon in the system tray and choose
281. ssenger monitoring 123 history 125 monitor mode 120 multi true or false question 344 NetSupport School 11 41 multi choice question 336 multi scan 118 name server 91 configuration 93 95 enable at Tutor 283 NetSupport School deploy a NetSupport School package 30 NetSupport Protect disable desktop security 289 NetSupport School starting 43 NetSupport School deploy 26 a Client configuration 35 a NetSupport School licence file 36 getting started 28 log files 40 pre define settings 39 remote uninstall 37 NetSupport School deploy via room mode 41 observation mode 347 order items question 345 password at Control 287 protect Control configuration 290 pc mode 66 peer assessment 240 performance settings 286 planner 259 planning an installation 13 play replay file 165 play video 157 158 via explorer 158 policy management 325 pot luck question type 235 pre define deploy settings 39 pre define lesson plan 259 pre requisites 14 pre set messages 176 preview exam 356 printer management 242 history 247 using print management 244 profiles 252 protect Control configuration 287 290 publish class 70 publish exam 357 question and answer module 232 bouncing questions 239 enter an answer 234 first to answer 234 peer assessment 240 pot luck 235 team mode 240 tutor interface 236 using question and answer module 238 question and answer module team module 240 question scores
282. ssssssrssrnsrrsrrserunnnnrrnnrnrnnsrrsernre 156 Using Audio while SHOWING ssssssssssssssssrssrnsnrsrrsuernrnnnnnnernrnnnrrsernre 156 Adjusting AUdiO SettingS cccecececeee cent eee eee tenet nena eens eeeeeaeaeas 157 NetSupport School Video Player cccceeeeeeeeeeeee eee ee eeee eens ee eeeeeaeaeas 158 Play a Video file on a workstation cece cece ee ee ee ee eee eeeeeeeeaes 159 Playing Videos via EXplOrer cccceeeeee este tees ee ee ee eeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeaeaea 159 NetSupport School Video Player Control Panel sseeeeeeeeeees 160 Using Replay FICS i 2 cisdisaeeereeeke ascended a a dade te deen de nnel aa aaa 162 Record Replay Files For All Students ccccseeeeeee tesa ease eeeeeeeeeeaes 163 Record Replay Files for Individual Students csseeeeeeeeeeeees 164 Record Replay Files at the Tutor c cceceeee cess cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeanaea 165 Watching Replay Files ci sinini ensina aaa anaa i 166 Replay Window Control Panel ssssssssssssssrssrssrnsrrsrnnernrrnnrrnrrernns 167 Showing Replay Files to Students ssssssssssssrssrernesrrnrrnrnnsrrerrrrnns 169 Converting Replay Files to Video FileS ssssssssrsssesrrsrrrrrrsrrerrrres 170 SHOW APPliCAtiON vicar cide aves est ade geatenne nes vageahsedeatanersteendonaatuetestiaenke 171 Chatting to Students irre dese E AA OA EEA EAEE 172 The Chat WindOws sicicecevevsseseciade sates annann rE Gn Nna a 174 Sending a Message
283. stances it may be desirable to disable this For example on an ISDN line where a TCP IP client is loaded a symptom may occur where the ISDN line is brought up unintentionally Use Name amp Connectivity Server Gateway Enable this option if you want the Students current IP address to register with a designated Name Server Gateway on start up Click Configure and enter the IP address of the Name Server along with the matching security key Multicast address This is the IP multicast address that the Student is listening on 267 NetSupport School 11 41 Notes e If you are using routers you must ensure that they are configured to pass through data using this port e Changing port could interfere with other TCP IP applications Click Test to check that the protocol is correctly installed on this workstation Room Settings Allows you to specify the room settings for Students when connecting via Room mode NetSupport School Client Configurator Network Settings Room Security Audio User Interface Room This computer is always located in the following room Eval This is a mobile computer and may be in one of the following rooms Advanced Journal Terminal Services PP PPP This is a mobile computer and its room will be entered manually Co m This Computer is always located in the following room If the computer is always located in the same room select this op
284. stations and choose Deploy NetSupport School Licence file 3 The Deploy Summary dialog will appear Click Properties to enter the details for the deployment 5 Click Browse to specify the folder containing the licence file that is to be deployed The default file is NSM LIC 6 For the new settings to take effect immediately by default the Client Service will be automatically restarted after the deployment If not required uncheck the Restart the NetSupport School Client service box 7 Click OK to return to the Summary dialog You can view the contents of the licence file by clicking on the file name 8 Click Deploy A progress dialog will appear enabling you to monitor the status of the deployment 9 Click Close when complete 36 NetSupport School 11 41 Remote Uninstall Using NetSupport School Deploy you can remotely uninstall a NetSupport School package 1 2 Select the required workstations Choose Deploy Uninstall NetSupport School from the Deploy Main window drop down menu Or Right click the selected workstations and choose Deploy Uninstall NetSupport School The Deploy Summary dialog will appear Click Properties to enter the details for the deployment The Uninstall NetSupport School dialog will appear Uninstall NetSupport Sch General Acknowledgement Message Restart Description Uninstall NetSupport School Enter the properties for the deployment by selecting the fo
285. t Student can answer and this can continue around the whole class until all Students who have answered have been included 240 NetSupport School 11 41 Peer Assessment Peer assessment allows Students to give feedback in response to an answer given by one of their classmates After a question has been answered you can ask the rest of the class to assess the answer by clicking on the er button A dialog appears at Student screens asking them to decide if the answer was correct or not As the Students answer the Student thumbnail at the Tutor will change to reflect the number of Students who think their answer is right or wrong Question and Answer Team Mode You can use team mode when selecting Team first to answer or Team enter an answer question types Students then compete for rewards as a group rather than individually Teams can be created randomly or Students can pick a team to join Custom team names can be created and you can customise the colour allocated to the team Using Team Mode 1 Select Team first to answer or Team enter an answer from the Question type dialog Or Select Q amp A Question Type from the Control window drop down menu and select the required question type Or Select the Types icon at the bottom of the Control window and select the required question type 2 Select the required properties for the question in the Ask the question dialog Click OK 3 The Create Teams dialog will appear Create Teams
286. t answered p a The Student has answered You can mark their answer correct or incorrect by clicking on the tick or cross Clicking the thumbs up down button allows the rest of the class to peer assess the answer The yellow number indicates that this Student answered the fastest Student has been marked correct The number of rewards the Student currently has is also displayed E Student has been marked incorrect 237 238 NetSupport School 11 41 Student is excluded from the round The time ran out in Enter an answer mode before the Student answered A Student is being peer assessed the green and red areas will fill as Students respond Student thought the answer was correct in peer assess mode Student thought the answer was incorrect in peer assess mode During a pot luck question student icons flash in this state to indicate they might be selected A corresponding large is also shown at Student screens NetSupport School 11 41 Using the Question and Answer Module Once a Question and Answer session has begun you will be able to see who has responded and mark Student answers by clicking the tick or cross on the Student s thumbnail Awards can be given for a correct answer and deducted for an incorrect answer you can configure these options in the Question amp Answer options dialog Students can see their current awards in the Question and Answer dialog
287. t options Network Settings Set the network transport that the Client will use for communicating with the Control program It must be the same as that set at the Control Room Specify where to connect the Client when using Room mode Security Set passwords to protect the configuration and prevent unauthorised access to the Client workstation Audio Set the Audio settings for the Client Both the Client and the Control workstations must have Audio hardware installed in order to use NetSupport School s Audio features User Interface Customise the interface between the Client and Control Advanced Set a personalised Student name and the behaviour of certain remote control features Student Journal Customise the settings for the Student Journal Terminal Services Allows you to configure the Terminal Services settings for the Student 266 NetSupport School 11 41 Network Settings Allows you to set up the network transport for a Client It must be the same as that set at the Control NetSupport School Client Configurator T Network Settings TCP IP V Send Keepalive Packets Multicast address 225 16 8 68 ok cancel Help TCP IP Port The TCP IP protocol requires that a port number be allocated for applications to communicate through The default registered port for NetSupport School is 5405 Send Keep Alive Packets Some TCP stacks send Keep Alive Packets In some circum
288. t to Students Note By default the startup mode is Connect to Student in Room s In this mode the Room field displays the room specified at startup and cannot be changed Required Student Details Decide which details to prompt the Students for You can also add two custom fields to the form Note If the Get Logged on User Name option is selected the first name and surname will be greyed out and the Student name will automatically default to the login name 53 NetSupport School 11 41 Auto Save Register Student registration details can be viewed in a report but this will be lost when the Control disconnects If you want to store a copy of the report check this option You will be prompted for a file name location and file format CSV HTML or XML Click Register to send the form to Student machines You can monitor progress as the Students respond Click Close when all Students have Signed In the Client icon in the Control window will now display the registered name NetSupport School Student a Class Details Teacher Name Mrs Smith Lesson Title English Room 42b Please provide your personal details for the lesson register First Name Sarah Sumame Smith OK Sign Out At the end of a lesson you can reset the Client names using the Sign Out option 1 Choose School Student Register from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Student Register icon on the toolbar
289. tSupport School NetSupport School Test Designer On Windows 8 machines right click in the Start screen and choose All Apps at the bottom of the screen Click the NetSupport School Test Designer icon Or Select School Test Designer from the Tutor Console drop down menu Or If displayed click the Test Designer icon on the Tutor Console toolbar The Test Designer logon screen will appear Enter your user name and password Note NetSupport School provides a default Administrator logon for use the first time you access the Designer User Name admin Password admin but you can add additional users 333 NetSupport School 11 41 The Test Designer User Interface The Designer comprises two modes of operation Questions and Exams You navigate the two interfaces using the drop down menus or the icons displayed above each tree view Stored Questions grouped by Subject are shown in the top pane and Exams at the bottom The right hand pane shows a preview of the currently selected Question or Exam EE NetSupport School Designer keda File Questions Exams Help Users Import Export Logoft Publish Resources Layout Help e T3 aa auoe Are the following statements true or false 3 8 NSS Admin General j L Geography m 5 Capital Cities Identify the correct capital cities for the countries lis J Countries a Oceans a History 5 Science Answer There are 86 400 seconds in a day g lo
290. tSupport School 11 41 snapshot of the screen Although this will have a greater impact on the network it will at least provide an accurate representation of the Client s screen Create Replay File at Client The Show session can be recorded and stored in a Replay file giving Clients the opportunity to playback the session at a later date To end the Show 1 Click the NetSupport School button Or Double click the Show icon on the taskbar Or Double click the NetSupport School Tutor icon on the desktop 2 This will display the Show Suspended dialog i NetSupport School Show Suspended Currently showing to End z i 8 Andy S F Continue a Jane 8 Show Leader Lisa See I PsP z Hep 3 Click End Or 1 Right click the Show icon on the taskbar 2 Click End Show Or 1 Use the hot key combination CTRL ALT END 139 NetSupport School 11 41 To enable the Control to Continue working in the background while Showing 1 Click the NetSupport School button on the taskbar 2 The Showing dialog will be displayed 3 Click Continue The Control window will be displayed and the Title bar will indicate that the Show is suspended You can now continue to use the Control workstation without the Clients seeing what you are doing The Client screens will still display the previous Show To Resume a Show while Suspended 1 Click Resume on the Control window toolbar Or 1 Choose
291. tage of three is to set the question followed by the correct answer and up to three false answers When the question is run at Student machines the answers are randomly arranged Multi Choice Wiza Question and Answer A Question Who wrote Macbeth Answer W Wiliam Shakespeare False Answers Answer B Mary Shelley Answer2 B Walter Scott FI Answer3 B Stephen Kng e oe as Enter your question in the dialog at the top of the screen You can enter the corect answer and up to three other answers to complete the multiple choice question When done click next to continue Comet Ce Once you have completed part one of the wizard click Next 338 NetSupport School 11 41 Drag and Drop Text The Student is presented with four partially completed statements They must complete the statement by dragging and dropping the appropriate word or phrase from a list The first stage of three is to enter the instructions for the question along with the four statements Within each statement highlight with your mouse the word or phrase that you will want the Students to drag and drop clicking Set Answer when you are happy that you have selected the appropriate text When the question is run at Student machines the four highlighted items are removed from the statements and randomly arranged ag ag Instructions Statement 1 Statement 2 Statement 3 Statement 4 Who wrote the fo
292. teachers around the ICT suite and is also the ideal tool to allow teaching assistants to help with monitoring student progress The NetSupport School Tutor Assistant works on iPad iPhone iTouch Kindle Fire Android phones and Android Tablets and is available for free from the Apple and Android app stores as well as Google Play Stage 1 Configuring the NetSupport School Tutor to connect to the NetSupport School Tutor Assistant You will be prompted to configure the NetSupport School Tutor Assistant connections when the Tutor starts From here you can set a pass code to authenticate connections from the Tutor Assistant To access the full Tutor Assistant configuration settings 1 Select View Current Settings Tutor Assistant from the Control window drop down menu 2 The Tutor Assistant configuration settings dialog will appear 3 Enter a name for the NetSupport School Tutor that will appear at the Tutor Assistant 4 Enter the connection port and password to authenticate connections 80 5 6 NetSupport School 11 41 Decide whether to allow Tutor Assistants to be automatically authorised or manually authorised Click OK Stage 2 Installing the NetSupport School Tutor Assistant 1 2 3 Download the NetSupport School Tutor Assistant from the Apple App store or Google Play store Tap the Assistant icon on the home page Enter the IP address of the NetSupport School Tutor console you wish to connect to
293. th just a NSM LIC 20 User the software would limit to a maximum of 20 connections of regardless of whether they are from Google Chrome or standard NetSupport School Students 86 NetSupport School 11 41 Installing and configuring the NetSupport School Student for Android NetSupport School delivers the tools you need to help maximise the effectiveness of computer led teaching on Android devices The NetSupport School Student for Android can be installed on each Android tablet From the teacher s desktop you can then connect to each system enabling you to interact with each student quickly and efficiently The NetSupport School Student for Android app works on Android v4 0 or later tablets and is available for free from the Google Play store Set up and configure the NetSupport School Student for Android You can pre configure each device with the required password protected classroom connectivity settings from the device or push the settings to each device from within the NetSupport School Tutor program 1 Select School Tablet Apply Student Settings from the Control drop down window The Student Settings dialog will appear Select the students you wish to send the settings to To amend the configuration settings click Modify The Modify Student Settings dialog will appear Set the required options and click Save If a password has already been set at the Android device enter this Click Send You can now browse fo
294. the Selected Computers list Click Finish to deploy to the selected computers Room 42b Workgroup D omain WORKGROUP oa Available Computers Computers to deploy to Name Comment Name Comment Nslnetx001 E Nstbuildo02 Nslliive001 LE NsInetx001 Nslisc Simon s XPS Nsldsc001 Nslgrw pc Nsldsc003 Nsldss002 Nsldsc005 f Nsldsc005 Adda llo gt Nsldsc004 Nsldsc003 Nsldsc002 Nsldsc001 Nslbuild002 Ms server2k3 Lh dfyql88ai130 Korean lt lt Remove All Finish f a 3 Enter the room to assign the computers 4 The drop down list will display all the available Domains and workgroups you can also deploy to specific IP ranges by selecting Add a new IP range from the list 5 Select the required group the available computers will be displayed in the Available Computers list 6 Select the computer s to deploy the Student software to and click Add The computer s will be moved to the Selected Computers list 41 NetSupport School 11 41 7 Click Finish to commence the installation A progress dialog will appear enabling you to monitor the deployment as it installs on each computer 8 The NetSupport School Student software will be deployed to the requested machine and assigned to the room specified Note You can also access the NetSupport School Basic Deploy dialog from the Tutor Configurator Select School Configuration Network and Wireless Settings
295. the Control window By clicking on a button you will View the Clients screen by clicking on the button while Viewing the View window will be closed To View a Client 1 Double click the required Client icon in the List view Or With the required Client icon selected choose Student View from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the View Client icon on the Control toolbar Or Right click the Client icon and choose View Or Click the required Client name on the Quick view toolbar 2 The View window for that Client will appear at the Control To aid navigation of the Client screen a thumbnail image of the screen is displayed enabling you to scroll the Client desktop more easily Simply click and drag inside the thumbnail to view specific areas The navigation panel can be enabled or disabled by selecting View Navigation from the View window drop down menu 109 NetSupport School 11 41 P Alex Brown Viewing mee Client View TE Window Help encer g AB ACILEGEE View Scale Full ile Chat Senda Launch Clipboard Audio Settings Logout Blank Capture Annotate message Application Screen shot E MARKETINGO uk viewing this machine P sec Learning 1T Free eso Ya ww bbe co uk learning subjects nformation_technology shtml ne Pp ES Bee Bo June 2012 Le arnin online learning support and advice BBC Homepage H Other subjects Your guide to IT learning r
296. the Remote pane indicate which Clients you wish to copy files to by checking the tick box beside the Client name From the Local pane Tree view select the item s to be copied to the Clients The location on the Client workstations where the files folders are copied to is called the Destination Folder Unless otherwise specified the Client Destination Folder will be the same as the item s location on the Control workstation If the Client does not have the same Folder available the item s will be copied to the C Drive by default and the folders automatically created Or To set a specific Destination Folder on the Client workstation right click the Client icon in the Remote pane and choose Set Destination Specify a destination then click OK Click Copy Note When a file is distributed to Android Students it will be copied across to the File Explorer for the Students to access 186 NetSupport School 11 41 Sending and Collecting Work The Send Collect work feature enables you to send a document or a number of documents to individual or multiple Client workstations You can then collect Students responses on your workstation To Send work Two methods are available for sending pre prepared work files to Student workstations e Quick Send is useful for one off operations where you want to send work to all connected Students or a defined group of Students e Advanced Send enables you to store the properties of
297. the left hand side of the Control window The List view will display each Student thumbnail By mousing over a thumbnail you can zoom into that screen Double clicking on a thumbnail will open a view session to the selected Student right click and you can select from the full range of available Client features For example by selecting multiple thumbnails you can invite those Students into a Chat session 121 NetSupport School 11 41 Note The Zoom facility can be toggled on off by selecting Monitor Zoomed Mode from the Control window drop down menu or clicking the Zoom In icon at the bottom of the Control window Monitor Mode provides a number of additional tools Customise Thumbnail Size Student thumbnails can be resized to suit personal preferences This is particularly useful when connected to large numbers of Student machines 1 Choose Monitor Size from the Control window drop down menu 2 Select the required size from the available options Or 1 Use the slider on the Size icon at the bottom of the Control window to select the required size Auto Fit Size of Student Thumbnail This option will automatically adjust the size of the displayed thumbnails to fit the window 1 Choose Monitor Auto fit Students from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Auto icon at the bottom of the Control window Note The Tutor interface can be viewed full screen by pressing F11 should more room be
298. the reason why the connection failed Broadcast Settings Enable Broadcast Show and File Distribution When performing a show or distributing files to Students the screen information files are sent to each Student machine in turn Enabling Broadcast Show and File Distribution results in the screen information and files being sent to all machines simultaneously In some network environments where there is limited network bandwidth available or when broadcasting to larger numbers of machines this will provide significant performance benefits Whilst reducing overall network traffic generated by NetSupport School using this feature will generate additional broadcast packets on your network It is recommended that you consult your network administrator before using this feature Note Show and File Distribution can be sent using multicast instead of UDP broadcast This means that the multicast packet will only be sent to machines included in the specified IP multicast address Select Use Multicast to switch to this method Settings If the Broadcast Show and File Distribution option is enabled select this option to set the multicast or broadcast address The Broadcast Settings dialog will appear If multiple Tutors are attempting to use UDP Broadcast Show simultaneously on the same subnet it is recommended that each uses a unique port to avoid conflict Wireless Network Check this option in order to optimise Show performance a
299. the required base Port number the default value is 25405 278 NetSupport School 11 41 Student name Enter the required name for the Student if left blank a unique ID will be displayed defaults to CLIENTNAME When entering a Student name you must include at least one environment variable e g computername Use lookup file to set room Checking this option allows you to allocate Students to different rooms when connecting via Room mode a lookup file containing the Student name and required room must be used The lookup file should be saved with a csv extension and should be in the format Student Identifier Room value Note For further information regarding Terminal Server support please visit www netsupportsoftware com support and refer to the Technical Document Setting Up NetSupport School to run in a Microsoft Terminal Server Environment TD128 279 NetSupport School 11 41 CONFIGURING THE TUTOR WORKSTATION To configure the NetSupport School Control choose School Configuration from the Control window drop down menu The Control Configurator has the following options Start Options Allows you to specify the startup options for the Tutor and also set the level of access for the various modes Network and Wireless Settings This is used for setting the network transport that the Control will use for communicating with the Client program It must be the same as that set
300. tically adjust the size of the displayed thumbnails to fit the window Different icons will be displayed for the Tutor and the Student allowing you to easily differentiate between the two A connection bar showing the link from the Tutor to the Students will also be displayed You can manually set a machine to show as a Tutor machine right click the required Client and click Properties In the General tab select the This is a teacher s computer check box The Tech Console brings together the main NetSupport School Tutor Console features e Monitor all computers across the school network in a single view e Monitor Application and Internet usage on each Student PC e Transfer files and folders to selected or all computers e Group all computers by classroom physical location e Hardware Software Inventory e Provide direct technical assistance to any classroom Teacher 323 NetSupport School 11 41 Power On Off classroom computers remotely Reboot Logout classroom computers remotely Automatically login computers Display all Students and Teachers by active class Review individual NetSupport School client security settings remotely Conduct Chat with one or multiple Students or Teachers Broadcast messages to groups or all network users in seconds Perform powerful 1 1 PC Remote Control on any selected computer Shows real time USB memory Stick status on all Student PCs Lock Unlock Students Keyboard and Mouse Execute appli
301. tion and enter the required room This is a mobile computer and may be in one of the following rooms Select this option if the computer could be located in different rooms enter the required rooms and separate each value with a comma 268 NetSupport School 11 41 This is a mobile computer and its room will be entered manually Select this option if the computer is a mobile computer the Student will then have an option from the Student icon in the taskbar to manually enter the room Note If the Student icon is hidden in the taskbar the Student can still manually enter the room by running the setroom exe This file is located in the NetSupport School Program folder on the Student machine Security Settings This property sheet is used to set security at the Client NetSupport School Client Configurator x Network Settings Student Security Room Security Key Security Enable user Acknowledgement 5 Journal Display Customizable Text t Terminal Services When Connected When Viewed Configurator Security Settings Configurator Password Enable user Acknowledgement for Tech Console connections Applies to Tutor only installs Don t apply central policies to this computer Coa Heb Student Security Security Key This sets a security key that must be the same as that set at the Control before the Control will be allowed to connect This setting is optional If there i
302. tion for the Tutor Settings for Configuration NetSupport School ES Tutor Identification Name Description mance Selection TCP IP Settings ort Protect Connect By Hostname DHCP WINS Pot 5405 4 Administration Include Chromebooks oF Security E Use Name amp Connectivity Server 23 Profile Browsing Subnets used when browsing for students Settings V Accelerate Browse Broadcast Settings I7 Enable Broadcast Show and File Distribution _ Settings Use Multicast Use Broadcast E Wireless Network Deploy mci a Help Tutor Identification Use these options to personalise the Tutor machines configuration Name This is the name by which the Tutor will be known on the network Setting it to an asterisk defaults to the machine or computer name Description This is used to provide a description for the Tutor program itself This is displayed in the Title bar of the Client program 284 NetSupport School 11 41 TCP IP Settings Connect by Hostname DHCP WINS networks Normally the Control connects to a Client by IP address rather than by name In an environment that uses DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol this may be undesirable as the address may change when the Client workstation is restarted Checking this option forces the Control to connect by hostname Port The TCP IP protocol requires that a port number be allocated for applications to communicate through
303. tion for the Class Lists to be stored by using the following registry key and then specifying a location Files Classlist HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Productive Computer Insight PCICTL ConfigList Standard Files Classlist C Temp 72 NetSupport School 11 41 Connecting to NetSupport Assist Students NetSupport Assist is a Classroom Management tool providing support for Mac amp Linux classrooms The NetSupport School Tutor can also connect to NetSupport Assist Students if required Before the NetSupport School Tutor is loaded copy the NSA LIC into the NetSupport School program directory C Program Files NetSupport NetSupport School The NetSupport School Tutor will then allow connections to NetSupport Assist Students Licence count restrictions will apply to each individual product Note NetSupport Assist Students will only have functionality that is available in NetSupport Assist To find out more information about NetSupport Assist visit www netsupportassist com 73 NetSupport School 11 41 Client Disconnects from an Active Session During an active session you may find that Students inadvertently disconnect for example when they reboot their machine Each time a Student disconnects a message will appear advising which Student has disconnected you can dismiss this prompt or leave to timeout as it will allow you to carry on working this message can be disabled if required To Disable the Discon
304. tion of applying settings globally or in some instances at individual Student level To adjust global Configuration settings 1 From the Control window drop down menu choose View Current Settings 2 The Settings dialog will appear select the relevant option Remote Control View Keyboard Mouse Replay Files Audio File Transfer User Interface Tutor Student Tutor Assistant Group Leaders Student Toolbar Journal Show 3 Configure the options to be enabled or disabled 4 Click OK when complete The selected settings will apply to all Clients and will automatically be saved for future Control sessions Configuration settings for individual Clients The Remote Control settings View Keyboard Mouse Replay Files and Audio can be customised for individual Clients For example on one Client you may want to use compression because it is on a slow link but on another you may want to turn compression off To adjust settings for individual Clients 1 View the required Client 2 Choose View Settings for Client from the View window drop down menu 297 NetSupport School 11 41 3 The Settings dialog will appear select the relevant option View Keyboard Mouse Replay Files or Audio 4 Configure the options to be enabled or disabled during the View session Note If you want to change the settings permanently check the Update Configuration NetSupport School box 298 NetSupport School 11 41 Tuto
305. tis running 86000000000 Sarah Sarah gt Testis running G8GG0OQ00000 al i 00 05 4 Unlock student machines when they finish Hep A h 5 This dialog is used to start the exam monitor Student progress and collect results 364 NetSupport School 11 41 The window enables you to track individual Student progress Each question is marked in real time so you can see immediately how each Student is doing At the end of the exam you can view the results by class and individual Student and print a permanent record You can also show each Student their results giving them the opportunity to see where they made mistakes The following toolbar options are available View Client You can view a particular Student screen at any point during the exam All options normally associated with the View window are available Chat If required you can open a Chat session with Students while the exam is running Although the Test Player provides a help button offering Students guidance with each question type you may find that you need to offer additional assistance Test Login Before starting the exam you can ask each Student to login with their own name This would be useful if for example the machine name is listed and be more meaningful when checking results against each Student Pause Test You can Pause the exam at any point Click Start when ready to continue Start Test Starts running the exam at Student PCs Stop Test If
306. to the Student icons Large icons only Red for restricted green for approved 205 NetSupport School 11 41 4 Ifa Student is currently viewing a website included in the activated restriction list they will be redirected to a message stating that the URL has been blocked by the Tutor Notes You can amend the URL that restricted websites will be redirected to Choose School Configuration Administration Security from the Control window drop down menu and enter the required URL under Redirect URL Full internet redirection is supported on Internet Explorer Netscape in IE Mode and browsers that provide IE based rendering For Mozilla and Firefox the browser window will close You can specify a time limit that certain Internet permissions apply for Select Web Allow access for limited time Once the time limit has expired the permission will revert to Block All f End approved or restricted websites 1 2 3 206 To remove the restrictions for individual Students select their icons in the List view Choose Web Unrestricted Access from the drop down menu Or Click the Unrestricted icon at the bottom of the Control window Or Click the Web Access icon on the Control toolbar and choose Unrestricted The green or red indicator will be removed from the selected Student icons NetSupport School 11 41 Note Because internet browsers often hold the results of recent web
307. tor program is minimised the Tutor Toolbar will be displayed providing access to key NetSupport School features Uncheck this option to disable this Show active Print Jobs Displays any active Print jobs in all views Show Student alert level Students can raise an alert from the Student toolbar the Student icon will change colour at the Tutor depending on the type of alert raised This option enables you to show or hide these alerts Show wireless and battery status You can choose to show both the wireless and battery status and show only the battery level when it drops below 10 311 NetSupport School 11 41 Student User Interface Settings Settings for Configuration NetSupport School EA a Remote Control Student 3 View Blank screen when locking mouse and keyboard 2 Keyboard Mouse 7 Display image when locking mouse and keyboard 2 Replay Files J Mute sound when locking mouse keyboard or blanking screen 33 Audio File Transfer 5 User Interface Student to Student Chat Tutor 4 Lock Keyboard 3 Student V Lock Mouse Tutor Assistant t Group Leaders t Student Toolbar D Journal show Update Configuration NetSupport School Cancel l Help Blank screen when locking mouse and keyboard Blanks the Client screen when their keyboard and mouse are locked You can also blank a Client screen while Viewing Display image when locking mouse and keyboard Displays a full screen image on the Client sc
308. trol Security Key You can set a security key that will ensure that only Controls and Clients with matching keys are able to connect Setting an asterisk defaults the security key to be the same as the serial number Note that this must set at both the Control and the Client If a security key is set here this Control will only connect to Clients with the same or no security key 292 NetSupport School 11 41 Redirect URL Allows you to specify the URL that Students will be redirected to if they try to access restricted web sites Shared Data Checking this option allows you to share data files with other users By default on a new install this option will be disabled By default on an upgrade this option will be enabled 293 NetSupport School 11 41 Administration Profiles This property sheet enables you to Add Edit or Delete Tutor Profiles Settings for Configuration NetSupport School es 4 start Options Settings for Configuration NetSupport School 5 Sti ptions 3 Restrictions 4 9 File Locations 3 File Locations Change Change Change Change School wdl Change _Ganeel Help T After creating for example an approved or restricted list of websites and applications you can add the files containing this information to a Tutor Profile On entering the Tutor program the user simply selects the required profile to load
309. trol are using the same keyboard layout you should select Unmapped Keyboard from the list Hotkeys When you are viewing a Client in Full Screen mode hotkeys provide a way of returning to the possibly hidden user interface If the screen resolution at the Client is smaller than the resolution of the Control you can simply click your mouse button outside the view window to stop viewing and display the view window again Check the boxes in this group to determine the keys that are used as Hotkeys AutoScroll Speed When you are viewing a Client s screen the Control can automatically scroll the contents when the mouse moves close to the edges of the window Adjusting the sliding control sets the speed at which the view scrolls from not at all to very fast 302 NetSupport School 11 41 Scroll Delay When Auto Scroll is enabled you can change the delay before the scroll is activated If you want the view to scroll as soon as the mouse is at an edge of the screen move the slider towards Min If you prefer a longer delay before the AutoScroll takes effect move the slider towards Max Mouse Delay Adjusting the mouse delay allows you to reduce the rate at which mouse updates are sent from the Control to the Client when controlling or sharing Move the slider control towards Infinite to reduce the rate and conserve bandwidth or towards Min for the best mouse response This is useful on dial up or very slow networks Disable Num Lock S
310. ts KN Group Leaders a Deauthorise Student Toolbar Delete Journal show 7 m Assistants Waiting For Authorisation l Authorise Delete lt il Automatic Authorisation Interactive Authorisation Ca ee Tutor Name ID The name that appears at the Tutor Assistant Selecting Custom allows you to enter your own name for the Tutor System Status Shows the current system status You can start and stop the system from here Start System when Tutor Starts The system will automatically start when the Tutor starts Current Network Address The network address for the Tutor Connection Port Enter the port number The default port is 37777 Connection Password Enter the password that Tutor Assistants will use to connect to the Tutor 314 NetSupport School 11 41 Show Password Displays the connection password Authorised Assistants Lists the Tutor Assistants that have been authorised to connect to the Tutor You can remove or unauthorise the Assistants from here Assistants waiting for Authorisation Lists the Tutor Assistants waiting for authorisation to connect to the Tutor Click Authorise to approve the Assistant Automatic Authorisation Tutor Assistants will be automatically authorised once they have entered the correct password Interactive Authorisation Tutor Assistants will require manual authorisation to connect to the Tutor 315 NetSupport School 11 41 Group Leader Settings When
311. ts are via Browse Mode PC Mode or User Mode You are now ready to install NetSupport School Tutor and Student programs 13 NetSupport School 11 41 System Pre Requisites Some areas of NetSupport School s functionality rely on the presence of certain files applications please ensure these are available before installing NetSupport School General Internet Explorer 5 service pack 2 or above Windows XP SP2 2003 SP2 Vista 2008 Windows 7 and Windows 8 50Mbytes free disk space for Student only installation 140Mbytes free disk space for a Tutor only installation 100Mbytes free disk space for an IT Technician only installation 160Mbytes free disk space for full installation TCP IP NetSupport School operates in Terminal Server Thin Zero Client Virtual Desktop Multiseat and shared resource computing environments and is supported on Google Chromebooks and Android tablets Tutor Assistant app supported on iOS devices running version 4 3 and higher Android 2 3 and higher Student for Android app supported on Android tablets running version 4 0 or later Student for iOS app supported on iOS devices running version 6 0 or later The NetSupport School Tutor requires a screen resolution of 1024 x 768 or above Synchronised Multimedia Player for WAV MOV AVI MPG etc files Note To use the Pin to Taskbar feature in Windows 7 you will need to remove certain words from the Reserved Word list Please
312. tting Print Thresholds Print thresholds can be applied for an individual print job allowing the Tutor to specify the maximum number of pages Students can print If the Student exceeds this limit the print job will be automatically paused or deleted 1 Choose Print Set Print Thresholds from the Control window drop down menu 2 The Print Thresholds dialog will appear allowing you to apply the relevant settings Pause Printing 1 Select the required Students in the List view 2 Choose Print Pause Printing from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Pause Printing icon at the bottom of the Control window 3 The Print status for the selected Student s will now show as paused 245 NetSupport School 11 41 Or 1 Select the required printer in the Printer list 2 Right click and choose Pause 3 Printing will be paused for the selected printer Block all Printing 1 Select the required Students in the List view 2 Choose Print Block All Printing from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Block Printing icon at the bottom of the Control window 3 The Print status for the selected Student s will now show as blocked Or 1 Select the required printer in the Printer list 2 Right click and choose Block 3 Printing will be blocked for the selected printer Delete Print Jobs You can delete all print jobs selected print jobs or all print jobs for a Student 1 Select the requ
313. tudents Click OK The result of the operation will be displayed for you to check that the work has been collected successfully To change the Properties of an Operation 1 e Choose School Send Collect Work Advanced from the Control window drop down menu bar Or Click the Send Collect Work icon on the Control toolbar and select Send Collect The Send Collect Work wizard will open Select an operation from the list and click Properties The Properties dialog will appear Adjust as necessary 191 NetSupport School 11 41 Remotely Launching applications on Student workstations This feature allows you to execute or open a software application on a Client or a group of Client workstations without actually Remote Controlling them For example after showing Students how to use a MS Office application you might want to start the application on their workstations Note The application itself must be installed on or available to the Client workstations To launch an application on a Student workstation 1 2 3 192 Select the required Client Choose Student Launch Application from the Control window drop down menu The Launch Application dialog will appear 3 NetSupport School 3 Z 6 e i wmplayer notepad iexplore Remove Click Add Enter the name and path of the application to execute at the Client Or Click the Browse button and select an executable a
314. ty settings can affect screen update performance 306 NetSupport School 11 41 Tutor File Transfer Settings You can configure the File Transfer settings in NetSupport School From the Control window drop down menu choose View Current Settings File Transfer Here you can alter the way in which information is displayed and set safety features such as confirmation before performing a damaging operation Settings for Configuration NetSupport School S 4 Remote Control Settings 2 View Display Options Keyboard Mouse E Show System Hidden files 53 Replay Files Show file details Audio Show filenames only 1 File Transfer 4 User Interface Confirm 5 Tutor v Folder copy v File overwrite 3 Student v Folder delete v File delete Tutor Assistant y a V Use Recycle Bin for local deletions when available TO Group Leaders a a 7 Use compression Student Toolbar Delta file transfer Journal t Show Priority when also viewing 0 Low High 7 Automatically close progress when copy finished Update Configuration NetSupport School Te Coa Display Options Show System Hidden files Check this box to display all files with System and Hidden attributes By default this option is unchecked Show file details Select this option to display multiple columns of information for each file in the list These show the file size modified date attributes and short filename You ca
315. u The printer icon will be displayed in all other views allowing you to see jobs as they happen pause delete and resume printing Notes e All printers will be displayed when you select Show Printers You can remove printers by removing the tick next to the printer in the Printer list e When a Student is printing a connection bar will be displayed from the printer to the Student that is printing 244 NetSupport School 11 41 Using Print Management Printers must be added to the Student workstation before the Tutor connects once connected to Students printers cannot be added removed or modified All printers that are attached to Student workstations will appear in the Printer List All printers that are attached to Student workstations will appear in the Printer List from here you can pause delete and resume printing by printer Student print jobs will be displayed in the Print Queue giving you an overview of who is printing what is being printed how many pages are printing and the current print status From here you can delete or resume printing for Students Notes e If Show printers is enabled you can pause delete and resume jobs via the Printer icon in any view e Print restrictions can be applied at startup Choose School Configuration Start Options Restrictions from the Control window drop down menu If the Student Toolbar is enabled Students will be notified of the current print status Se
316. u are communicating with a Client whether it is a File transfer View or Chat session the data being sent and received will be compressed This also provides a means of security as the data will also be encrypted Delta File Transfer Delta File Transfer improves performance by skipping the transfer of information that is unchanged If the file being transferred already exists in the destination folder only the changed parts of the file will be updated Delta File Transfer is enabled by default 308 NetSupport School 11 41 Priority when also viewing When you are transferring files and viewing a Clients screen at the same time each operation impacts the performance of the other You can reduce the priority of a File Transfer operation to make the viewing more responsive and vice versa Slide the control to the left to give the File Transfer higher priority or to the right to give Client views higher priority If you are not viewing a Client this setting is ignored Automatically close progress when copy finished Closes the File transfer progress dialog automatically on completion Un tick this option if you want to see the File transfer results 309 NetSupport School 11 41 Tutor User Interface Settings The behaviour of the following interface options can be adjusted by selecting View Current Settings User Interface Student from the Control window drop down menu Settings for Configuration NetSupport Schoo
317. udent machine Block unauthorised websites Use approved websites only Block all internet access Launch a website on the Student Chromebook Close a website on the Student Chromebook During a view session you can copy the content of the clipboard between Teacher and Student machines Block FTP access See details of the website that students are currently viewing Ask students to register at the start of each lesson Three modes for grouping students by room to allow management of mobile students These features are not available when using the NetSupport School Tutor for Chrome 85 NetSupport School 11 41 Licensing for Google Chrome Each Google Chrome device that connects to the Name and Connectivity Server needs to be licensed Google Chrome Licences can be purchased independently of the main NetSupport School product and are registered with the Name and Connectivity Server by loading a new Licence file NSW LIC This file controls the number of Google Chrome Students that can connect If this file is not present then the usual Name and Connectivity Licence File NSM LIC will allow Google Chrome to connect but this will reduce the Licence count available for NetSupport School Students e g With both an NSM LIC 10 User and NSW LIC 10 user the software will independently limit to 10 connections of each type With 10 NetSupport School Students connected the 11th Google Chrome Student would be rejected Wi
318. up user accounts 358 testing module 331 device control 249 disable disconnect prompt 74 disable NetSupport Protect 289 disconnect 74 display customisable text 269 distributing files 183 distribution copy for installation 23 drag and drop image question 338 drag and drop text question 337 DVD support 273 edit exam 356 enable DVD support 273 enable student toolbar 261 enter an answer question type 234 exam grades 352 exams mode create exam 353 delete exam 357 edit exam 356 exam grades 352 preview exam 356 publish exam 357 question scores 355 exhibit Client screens 142 annotate while exhibiting 148 explorer show video 158 export data See testing module file distribution 183 file locations Tutor profiles 292 file transfer 180 between Clients 182 deleting files and folders 182 from a Client to the Control 181 from the Control to a Client 180 settings 305 first to answer question type 234 gateway 91 configuration 93 95 enable at Tutor 283 gateway configuration 373 NetSupport School 11 41 licences tab 96 get name 52 save Client login name 56 giving students rewards 264 google chrome 83 group chat 171 group leader settings 314 groups change members 99 creating 98 customise icons 103 group leaders 100 reinstate group leader 102 remove group leader 102 suspend group leader 102 working with groups 98 hardware inventory 323 help requests dealing with 178 disabl
319. ur tabs in turn General tab Provides a description of the package being uninstalled Acknowledgement tab Consider whether the workstations will be in use when commencing the deploy You can choose to e Uninstall NetSupport School Immediately No prompt will be received at the workstations being deployed to 37 38 NetSupport School 11 41 e Warn user before uninstalling NetSupport School The user will receive a prompt and needs to click OK for the uninstall to commence Users cannot cancel this e User can postpone uninstall of NetSupport School You can specify the number of times a user can postpone the uninstall If the user does choose to postpone they will be prompted the next time they restart the workstation Message tab You can specify a custom message to be displayed at each workstation while the uninstall is in progress Restart tab To completely remove all NetSupport School files the workstations must be restarted e Insist user restarts machine A message will be displayed at workstations advising the user to restart the PC to complete the process e Force restart At the end of the deployment a message is displayed advising users that the workstation will be restarted A time bar is displayed indicating how many seconds it is before the restart commences e Automatic restart if not logged in If the workstation being deployed to is not logged in restart will commence automatically When you have co
320. uring an active session is recorded in a text file default GW001 LOG This can be useful for checking which Clients and Controls have connected through the Gateway Location By default the log file is stored in the NetSupport School program folder i e program files netsupport netsupport school GWO01 log Select Browse to specify an alternative path Max File Size KB Over a period of time the log file could become quite large you can manage this by specifying a maximum file size When the limit is reached the existing information in the file is overwritten by the new records Note For changes to the log file settings to take affect you will need to restart the Gateway32 service 95 NetSupport School 11 41 Gateway Configuration Creating Keys Access to a Gateway Name Server is protected by use of a Security Key E NetSupport Gateway Configuration Utility es General Keys Licenses Security Gateway Keys Description Creation Date Gateway Key 1 Thu Jan 12 15 39 25 2012 Daite ok n The Gateway will not accept connections from a Tutor or Student unless a Gateway key is specified and that same key is also configured at both the Tutor and Student end The Gateway can support multiple keys at least one key must be specified Select Add to specify the key The Key must be at least 8 characters 96 NetSupport School 11 41 Gateway Configuration Utility Licen
321. urity e Choose whether to run the Remote Deploy utility This provides you with the facility to install and configure NetSupport School on multiple workstations Click Finish to exit the Setup program Remove the CD and restart the workstation 21 NetSupport School 11 41 Existing Installation Detected This screen will appear if a copy of NetSupport School is already installed on the workstation 39 NetSupport School InstallShield Wizard fe Program Maintenance A Modify repair or remove the program S Modify Custom Selection dialog in which you can change the way features are 3 Change which program features are installed This option displays the installed Repair Br Repair installation errors in the program This option fixes missing or corrupt files shortcuts and registry entries Remove S Remove NetSupport School from your computer InstallShield lt Back Cancel e Modify Change the program features that are installed e Repair Repair any installation errors in the program e Remove Remove NetSupport School from the computer Select the required option and click Next 22 NetSupport School 11 41 Creating an administrative network installation An administrative installation distribution copy of NetSupport School is designed to assist administrators to install NetSupport on networked PCs where the installation media or licence details may not be readily available an
322. urrent status of Internet Monitoring Restricted or Unrestricted access If Restrictions apply the list of approved websites will be displayed when Students click the Toolbar icon Enables the Student to initiate a Chat session 263 NetSupport School 11 41 Allow the Student to send a request for help Show Clock Show Rewards Show Objectives Allows Students to access their USB memory stick from the Toolbar Allow Students to access their Journal Allow Students to access resources applications web sites documents or folders that you define Show when you are listening to or recording the audio at the Student Show list of files sent to work on Enables the Student to send a Help Request to the Tutor Displays a clock Shows any rewards that have been given to the Student If Lesson Objectives have been set they will be displayed Allows Students to access their USB memory stick from the Toolbar Allows Students to view and add notes to their Journal from the Student Toolbar Allows Student to access any resources you have defined from the toolbar Advises Students when they are being listened to or if you are recording their audio Displays the files that have been sent via the Send Collect work feature The Student can work through these and indicate when they have been completed Note A Tutor Toolbar is also available this provides access to key NetSupport School features whe
323. utomatically send the message when the limit is reached You can add the content of the Chat session to the Student Journal by selecting Add to Journal Window Menu Only the Control s Chat window will have a window drop down menu This menu enables you to swap between opened screens or Tile them Chat Progress The main body of the Chat window is used to record the progress of a Chat session It holds details of members who have joined or left the discussion as well as the messages that have been sent by each member Send Message This is where you type your comments Type the message and press Enter or click Send Each message is restricted to 128 characters You can automatically send the message when the limit is reached select Chat Auto Send long Message from the Chat window drop down menu Note Emoticons can be included within the message 174 NetSupport School 11 41 Close Ends the Chat session Members Members currently included in the Chat session are listed here The Tutor can add or remove Students from the Chat session as required Unless disabled Clients have the option to leave the session of their own accord Invite The Chat Properties dialog is initially used to select the Clients to include exclude from the Chat session To add Clients when the Chat session is in progress click Invite The Add Members dialog will appear select the required Clients and click Add You can send a copy of the Ch
324. w Details The Details List view will appear Right click an application icon listed under Running Application Choose Activate The current application running on the Student workstation will now be replaced by the newly activated application The icon listed under Current Application will be replaced with the newly activated application icon Note You can minimise all applications at Student machines Select Student Desktop on the toolbar and click Show Desktop Launch an application on all connected Students 1 2 3 4 Or 220 Right click an application icon in the Approved Applications List Choose Send to Students The application will be launched on all connected Student workstations In the List view the Launched application icon will appear in the Current application list Highlight an application in the Approved Applications List Drag and drop the highlighted application into the List view The application will be launched on all connected Student workstations In the List view the Launched application icon will appear in the current application list NetSupport School 11 41 Setting up Approved or Restricted Applications Name Description Approved Applications The Student is only able to run the applications specified on this list Restricted Applications The Student is unable to run the applications specified on this list Note Application restrictions
325. when sharing information of this nature NetSupport School passes the font information by reference The target workstation will refer to it s own internal font mappings to find an appropriate match to the one that has been sent In most cases the same fonts will be available but if there are instances where this isn t the case you can send the full information Check this box to enable Restrict Internet access to approved sites only during Show Allows the Tutor to only access websites that are on the Approved Site List preventing inappropriate websites being displayed to Students during a Show 321 NetSupport School 11 41 TECH CONSOLE A classroom management solution is not simply about providing the right tools for each teacher equally important are tools to ensure all computers in the school can be managed and maintained so they are always available for teaching With this in mind NetSupport School provides a unique Tech Console specifically for IT technicians and network managers The Tech Console provides a single view of all computers across the school allowing technicians to review hardware and software inventory monitor internet and application usage apply always on internet application and printing policies and define security policies which all PCs across the school will be checked against to determine whether they are secure Note The Tech Console can be installed with other NetSupport School component
326. will open From the Control Tree view select the destination drive or folder into which the items will be copied Note The path to any open folders Explorer windows on the Client desktop is displayed at the top of the File Transfer window to enable quick selection This is only supported on Windows Vista and above 182 From the Client List view select the item s to be copied to the Control Click the toolbar Copy File button NetSupport School 11 41 7 A confirmation dialog will be displayed click Yes Note The required item s can also be dragged from the Client view and dropped into the appropriate folder in the Control view To transfer files between Clients With NetSupport School s File Transfer it is also possible to copy files and folders between two Clients To do this connect to each Client and display the File Transfer window for each Arrange the File Transfer Windows so you can see both and simply drag file folders from one Client to the other You can see more of a Clients files and folders by moving the horizontal sizing bar or clicking on the Maximise button located above the Clients folder tree Deleting files and folders You can delete files and folders from either a Control or Client machine using the File Transfer window To delete a file 1 Select the file you wish to delete 2 Click the toolbar Delete File button 3 A confirmation dialog will be displayed cli
327. within the Performance section of the Tutor settings are selected Colour reduction The view window thumbnails and the teacher s screen when broadcast will be restricted to 256 colours 90 NetSupport School 11 41 Low bandwidth mode The number of video frames transferred will be reduced to around 5 per second Additionally within the Network and Wireless Settings section of the Tutor console it is recommended that the following option is enabled when using NetSupport School on a wireless network Enable Broadcast Show When broadcasting the teacher s screen or distributing files to multiple students enabling this option will result in the screen data or files being sent to all machines simultaneously Finally performance can further be enhanced by reducing the speed that the Tutor console sends data onto the network to match the speed that the wireless access point can deliver the data Sending data onto the network too quickly may result in packets being lost which will result in the students requesting the data again and additional traffic being produced on the network For a wireless environment it is recommended that the following options are set Wireless Network Select this option to optimise NetSupport School for best performance in a wireless environment Maximum Throughput This option provides the ability to fine tune the speed that the Tutor console sends data to the connected student devices 91
328. wledgement 269 user defined tools 195 user mode 67 using audio support 154 using question and answer module 238 using the co browser 212 using this manual 12 values txt file 25 video player 157 control panel 159 play video 158 play video in Explorer 158 viewing 108 annotate while viewing 148 blank Client screen 111 Clients 108 launch an application 193 logout 197 modes 110 monitor mode 120 multiple screens 111 reboot 197 remote clipboard 113 scale to fit 110 screen capture 133 377 NetSupport School 11 41 send ctrl alt delete 111 send message 176 using audio 155 watch replay files 165 web browser 211 web control module 198 approved restricted lists 202 block all internet access 206 block FTP sites 207 change URLs 201 close URLs 201 history 209 launch URL 202 safe search mode 207 whiteboard 144 window application control 215 378 chat 173 control main 45 file distribution 183 file transfer 180 monitor mode 120 replay files 166 scan 115 Student survey 226 test reports 364 view 108 web control 198 wireless network optimise show performance 283 using netsupport school 89 working with groups 98 zoomed mode See monitor mode
329. wn menu to change mode The default view Mode is Normal View Note Student thumbnails can be viewed full screen by pressing F11 The Status Bar The Control Status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Control window It shows the Status of the Control and the number of currently connected Clients The current status of the Journal will be displayed when it s turned on To enable disable the Status bar choose View Status bar 49 NetSupport School 11 41 Tutor Toolbar The Tutor Toolbar provides details of the current lesson to the Tutor and access to key NetSupport School functions when the Tutor program is minimised The Tutor can mute sound at all of the Students add notes to the Student Journal Scan Chat Message Announce Show Lock Unlock Students Blank Student screens and block all Internet access by clicking the relevant icon When the Tutor program is maximised the Tutor Toolbar will disappear and any settings applied will show in the Control window 2 ins E Hgo D yame gG Mute Sound Notes Scan Chat Sendamessage Announce Show Lock BlankAll Block All Note The Tutor program can be maximised by double clicking the NetSupport School Tutor desktop icon To disable the Tutor Toolbar choose View Current Settings User Interface Tutor from the Control window drop down menu and uncheck Show Tutor Toolbar on minimizing Note There is also a Student Toolbar that can be activated at the Stu
330. ws 8 e Windows Server 2012 Planning NetSupport School Deploy is a powerful utility that makes installing NetSupport School packages on multiple workstations a quick and easy process However while we endeavour to ensure that there are no limitations or incompatibility issues in the use of the software it is recommended that a trial deploy is performed on a small number of workstations to ensure there are no conflicts with other similar products such as remote control or desktop security packages In addition for added security and protection you must have appropriate administrator rights for the machines you are deploying to Deploying on Windows XP and above To enable you to deploy NetSupport School on Windows XP Professional and above you need access to the Admin share on the remote machine in order to transfer the package to be deployed By default there is no access allowed to Admin share To enable network access In Administrative Tools select Local Security Policy 1 Select Security Settings Local Policies Security Options 2 Select Network access Sharing and security model for local accounts 3 Alter the setting for this policy to Classic local users authenticate as themselves The Admin share will now be available and you can deploy as normal 27 NetSupport School 11 41 Starting NetSupport School Deploy 1 Select NetSupport School Deploy from your NetSupport Program Group 2 The NetSupport Scho
331. ws you to Chat to any number of connected Clients simultaneously via a scrolling text window To Chat to Clients 1 172 Select the Clients or group of Clients you want to Chat to in the List View If you do not select a Student icon all connected Clients will be included Choose Student Chat from the Control window drop down menu Or Click the Communicate icon on the Control toolbar and choose Chat Or Right click an individual Client and choose Chat The Chat Properties dialog will appear Create Discussion EA Topic b Options Members can decline to join Members can t leave the chat Chat Window is always visible Add to Journal Members Name Description 72 Andy P Edde GP Lisa WY Sarah Cancel Help The Chat Properties dialog has the following options Topic If required enter a title or description for the subject to be discussed in the Chat session This will appear in the Title bar of the Chat window that is displayed at the Student machines If left blank the Control name will appear NetSupport School 11 41 Members To exclude Clients from the Chat session remove the check mark next to the Student name Options Members can decline to join If checked a message will appear at the Clients machine inviting them to join the Chat session They can choose to Join or Decline Members can t leave the chat If checked the option for Clients to Leave the Chat
332. y provides network administrators with the facility to install and configure NetSupport School on multiple workstations without the need to visit the machines individually You are provided with a view of your network allowing you to pick and choose which workstations you want to deploy to With NetSupport School Deploy you can e Remotely Install a NetSupport School package on multiple workstations simultaneously e Create and download specific Client configurations to multiple workstations e Remotely update NetSupport School licence details on multiple workstations e Remotely Uninstall a NetSupport School package from multiple workstations simultaneously Notes e When deploying to a Windows Vista PC or later within a domain the console user must be either logged onto the domain or enter the user credentials when prompted of a domain account that has local administrator rights to the target PC e The Deploy Prompt user options are not supported on Windows Vista and above Installing the Deploy Utility When installing NetSupport School you decide which combination of components to include To install NetSupport School Deploy select the Remote Deployment Utility along with any other components you require NetSupport School Deploy is currently supported on the following operating systems Windows XP Windows 2003 Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 2008r2 26 NetSupport School 11 41 e Windows 7 e Windo
333. ynchronisation Check this option if using a Laptop as the Control machine to ensure that the keyboards behaviour corresponds with that of a standard desktop machine 303 NetSupport School 11 41 Replay File Settings The Replay Files feature enables the Tutor to record and playback the screen activity that takes place at a Student workstation while it is being remote controlled viewed Settings for Configuration NetSupport School E3 4 Remote Control Replay Files view Record Replay Files Keyboard Mouse nclude Audio Replay Files 3 Audio 5 File Transfer a User Interface 3 Tutor Student Tutor Assistant Group Leaders gt Student Toolbar Journal Show refix Files With Client Name PP cB Y Record Replay Files Check this option to enable the recording of Replay Files A Replay File will be created each time the Tutor opens a view session at any Student machine Include Audio In addition to the screen mouse and keyboard activity if the workstation is configured for Audio you can record any microphone narration from the Tutor Note Desktop sounds music are unable to be recorded Prefix Files with Client name In order to identify each Replay File filenames are prefixed with the Client name and the date time of the recording Alternatively by unchecking this box the files will be named sequentially in the format 00000001 rpf etc In Folder Specify where the Replay

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

MANUEL D`INSTRUCTIONS  AUR-BU取扱説明書(PDF 992KB)  24Vホ一ンリレ一 耳又ィ寸ー取扱説明書  Magic Chef MCBM920S1 Use and Care Manual  Eurofase 23208-056 Installation Guide  DVT-6300 DVT-7300 DVT-8300    Photomakroskop  Installations-und Benutzerhandbuch Installation and  製品安全データシート(MSDS)  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file